DBS3900 Hardware Description 2013

DBS3900
Hardware Description
Issue
11
Date
2013-08-23
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
DBS3900
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document provides reference information for the DBS3900 site planning and deployment.
It describes the application scenarios, components, functional modules, and cables in the
DBS3900.
Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Product Version
DBS3900
V100R007C00
DBS3900 GSM
V100R014C00
DBS3900 WCDMA
V200R014C00
DBS3900 LTE
V100R005C00
DBS3900 LTE TDD
V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Base station installation personnel
System engineers
Site maintenance personnel
Organization
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

ii
DBS3900
About This Document
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet

The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the
cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900
This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of
various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900
cabinets.
5 DBS3900 Power System
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
7 DBS3900 Cables
This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various
scenarios.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

iii
DBS3900
About This Document
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
iv
DBS3900
About This Document
Convention
Description
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

DBS3900
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.....................................................................1
2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet......................................................................10
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply...............................................................................................11
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply...............................................................................................39
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply..................................................................................................48
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply..................................................................................................49
3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900.......................................................................................55

3.1 BBU3900......................................................................................................................................................................56
3.1.1 BBU3900...................................................................................................................................................................56
3.1.2 BBU3900 Functions..................................................................................................................................................57
3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................................57
3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment.......................................................................................................................................57
3.1.5 WMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................85
3.1.6 UMPT........................................................................................................................................................................91
3.1.7 GTMU.....................................................................................................................................................................100
3.1.8 LMPT.......................................................................................................................................................................108
3.1.9 WBBP......................................................................................................................................................................112
3.1.10 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................................118
3.1.11 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................................127
3.1.12 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................................129
3.1.13 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................................133
3.1.14 UTRP.....................................................................................................................................................................134
3.1.15 USCU.....................................................................................................................................................................142
3.1.16 UBRI......................................................................................................................................................................146
3.1.17 UCIU.....................................................................................................................................................................149
3.2 RRU............................................................................................................................................................................151
3.3 SLPU..........................................................................................................................................................................152
3.3.1 SLPU.......................................................................................................................................................................152
3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU......................................................................................................................152
3.3.3 UELP.......................................................................................................................................................................153
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

vi
DBS3900
Contents
3.3.4 UFLP.......................................................................................................................................................................155
3.3.5 USLP2.....................................................................................................................................................................156
3.4 WGRU........................................................................................................................................................................158
3.5 EMUA........................................................................................................................................................................161
4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks..................................................................................................163

4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900 ...........................................................................................164
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900....................................................................................................166
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900...................................................................218
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets............................................................................................................................220
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet.............................................................................................220
4.4.2 Components in the OMB.........................................................................................................................................220
4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)............................................................................................................................231
4.4.4 Components in the IMB03......................................................................................................................................242
4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack................................................................................255
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment.....................................................................................................269
5 DBS3900 Power System............................................................................................................273

5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables...................................................................275
5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet...........................................275
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet......................276
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)..............................................................................282
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) .............................................................287
5.1.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack or Wall.......................................293
5.1.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet ...................................................................295
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes......................................................................................................................................296
5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet............................................297
5.2.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet..............................301
5.2.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)..............................................................................310
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) .............................................................314
5.2.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack or Wall.......................................318
5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet ...................................................................321
6 DBS3900 Monitoring System..................................................................................................326

6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet..................................................328
6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet.................................329
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D).................................................................................333
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) ................................................................337
6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03 or IFS06...........................................................................339
6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet.......................................................................341
6.7 Customized Alarm Input............................................................................................................................................344
7 DBS3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................348
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900...........................................................................................................................349
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

vii
DBS3900
Contents
7.1.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................349

7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections............................................................................................................................385
7.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections.........................................................................................................................................409
7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections....................................................................................................................420
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections......................................................................................................................451
7.2 BBU3900 Cables........................................................................................................................................................453
7.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................................453
7.2.2 PGND Cable............................................................................................................................................................456
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable...................................................................................................................................................457
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable.............................................................................................................................................................459
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable...................................................................................................................463
7.2.6 FE/GE Cable............................................................................................................................................................464
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable........................................................................................................................465
7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports..........................................................................................466
7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports...................................................................................................466
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable......................................................................................................................................467
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable.........................................................................................................................................468
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable...................................................................................................................472
7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................473
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................473
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU................................................................................474
7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable..............................................................................................................475
7.2.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA...............................................................................................................476
7.2.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)....................................................................................................477
7.2.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)....................................................................................................478
7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.................................................................................................................................................479
7.2.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable........................................................................................................................................480
7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable.........................................................................................................................481
7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations........................................................................................................482
7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance....................................................................................................................484
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

viii
DBS3900
Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware

Description
This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.
11 (2013-08-23)
This is the eleventh official release.
Compared with issue 10 (2013-05-27), no topic is added to or deleted from this issue.
Compared with issue 10 (2013-05-27), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.10 LBBP
Added the LBBPd4 used in LTE TDD

scenarios.
10 (2013-05-27)
This is the tenth official release.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), this issue does not include any new information.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description
l 2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with

AC Power Supply
Added description related to an IBBS700T or

IBBS700D.
l 4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks

Used by the DBS3900
l 4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by
the DBS3900
l 4.3 Engineering Specifications of
Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
l 6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is
Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D)
l Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D)
l 3.1.5 WMPT
Added specifications of these boards.
l 3.1.6 UMPT
l 3.1.8 LMPT
l 3.1.9 WBBP
l 3.1.10 LBBP
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable
Added the principles for classifying and

selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.
Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), no information is deleted from this issue.
09 (2013-02-20)
This is the ninth official release.
Topic
Change Description
3.1.6 UMPT
Added the description of UMPTb1.
08 (2012-12-30)
This is the eighth official release.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description
7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable
Modified the exterior and length of the BBU

interconnection signal cable connecting
WBBPf to WBBPf.
7.2.3 BBU Power Cable
Added the description of the cables

complying with British Standards (BS).
07 (2012-11-08)
This is the seventh official release.
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), this issue includes the following new information:
l
3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications
DCDU-12B
Topic
Change Description
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900

Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C) Cabinet
Changed the requirements for the upper-level

circuit breakers and power cables when the
DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC
power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the TMC11H (Ver.C).
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed

in the APM30H (Ver.D)
3.1.6 UMPT
Changed the description of indicators on the

UMPT.
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with

AC Power Supply
All information about the APM30H (Ver.D1)

and TMC11H (Ver.D1) is deleted.

DC Power Supply
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used
by the DBS3900
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the
DBS3900
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various
Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and
Battery Cabinet
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description

6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D)
Compared with issue 06 (2012-09-15), the following infomation is deleted from this issue:
l
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D1)
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D1)
06 (2012-09-15)
This is the sixth official release.
l
5.1.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
Power cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H
(Ver.D1)
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
Monitoring cable connections in the scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H
(Ver.D1)
4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)
7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
Topic
Change Description

AC Power Supply
Added the application scenario of the

DBS3900 using the APM30H(Ver.D),
TMC11H(Ver.D), and OMB(Ver.C)
cabinets.

DC Power Supply
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used
by the DBS3900
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Added the exteriors, configurations,

engineering specifications, components,
configurations of the Upper-Level circuit
breakers and power cables, power
distribution schemes, monitoring system,
power cable connections, and monitoring
signal cable connections of the BTS3900

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various

Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
using the APM30H(Ver.D), TMC11H

(Ver.D), and OMB(Ver.C) cabinets.
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and

Battery Cabinet
Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900
Application Scenario of the DBS3900
Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, or
IFS06
Added the BBU power cable when the power

device is EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05.
05 (2012-08-05)
This is the fifth official release.
l
4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack
Topic
Change Description
3.1.10 LBBP
Added the information of combined

bandwidths.
3.1.14 UTRP
Deleted the UTRPb4 used in LTE mode.
3.1.7 GTMU
Added the TRX specifications of the board.
04 (2012-06-29)
This is the fourth official release.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description
3.1.15 USCU
Added the information of the USCUb14 and

the USCUb22.
Added the length of the cables.
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable

7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer
Cable
FE/GE Ethernet Cable
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable
03 (2012-06-20)
This is the third official release.
Topic
Change Description
3.1.9 WBBP
Added the description of silkscreens on the

boards.
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.15 USCU
Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C) Cabinet
Added the maximum power of the RRUs.
02 (2012-04-25)
This is the second official release.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description
3.1.5 WMPT
Changed the description of the indicators on

the boards.
3.1.6 UMPT
3.1.7 GTMU
3.1.8 LMPT
3.1.9 WBBP
3.1.11 FAN
3.1.12 UPEU
3.1.14 UTRP
3.1.15 USCU
3.1.17 UCIU
3.1.10 LBBP
3.1.16 UBRI
01 (2012-03-20)
This is the first official release.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
3.1.10 LBBP
Added the cell bandwidth supported by the

LBBPd.
Changed the exterior of the inter-BBU signal

cable.
Compared with draft A (2012-02-10), no information is deleted from this issue.
Draft A (2012-02-10)
This is a draft.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900
Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following new
information:
l
Engineering Specifications of the DBS3900
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet
HEUA
AC Surge Protection Box
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Station
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Station
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate

Transmission Mode
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate

Transmission Mode
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Station
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections
7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations
7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance
3.2 RRU
3.1.6 UMPT
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
Configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in 5.1.6 Application
Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
Power distribution scheme in 5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the
TP48600A Cabinet
Monitoring scheme in 6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A
Cabinet
Power cable connections in Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A
Monitoring signal cable connections in Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the
TP48600A Cabinet
Compared with the issues for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, this issue includes the following
changes:
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Topic
Change Description
Exteriors of DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
Added the exteriors of the OMB, IMB03, and

IFS06.

DBS3900
Topic
Change Description
3.1.9 WBBP
Added the description of the WBBPf.
3.1.10 LBBP
Added the description of the LBBPd.
3.1.15 USCU
Changed the names of the USCUb11,

USCUb12, and USCUb21.
3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment
Added the slot assignment rules for the

boards in BBU0 and BBU1 in the GU+UL
(BBUs cascaded) scenario.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS

+LTE Base Station
Added the CPRI cable connections in the

CPRI MUX topology.
Configurations of Cabinets Used by the

DBS3900
Added the configurations of the TP48600A

cabinet.
6.7 Customized Alarm Input
Added the customized alarm input when the

DBS3900 uses the TP48600A cabinet.
Compared with the documents for the MBTS V100R004C00, WCDMA NodeB V200R013C00,
GSM BTS V100R013C00, and eNodeB V100R004C00, no information is deleted from this
issue.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

DBS3900

Cabinet
About This Chapter

The DSB3900 consists of the required cabinets, BBU, RRUs, and other components in the
cabinets. This chapter describes various cabinet application scenarios.
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
This section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is
supplied with AC power.
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply
supplied with DC power.
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply
This section describes the scenario where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
power supply.
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply
This section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

10
DBS3900
2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

supplied with AC power.
Table 2-1 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied
with AC power.
Table 2-1 Installation scenarios
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
BBU Installation Position
Scenario Description
Remarks
APM30H (Ver.C)
The BBU is installed in an

APM30H (Ver.C) and the
RRUs are installed remotely.
The APM30H (Ver.C)
supplies power to the BBU
and RRUs.
APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.B) and RRUs
are installed remotely. The
APM30H (Ver.B) supplies
power to the BBU and RRUs.
The same configuration

principles are used for the
DBS3900 of which the BBU
is installed in an APM30H
(Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of
which the BBU is installed in
an APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet.
For details, see BBU
Installed in an APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)
Cabinet, which uses an
APM30H (Ver.C) as an
example.
APM30H (Ver.D)
BBU 0 is installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is
installed in an APM30H
(Ver.D) or TMC11H
(Ver.D), and RRUs are
installed remotely. The
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
power to the BBU, and the
APM30H (Ver.D) supplies
power to RRUs.
BBU Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.D) or
TMC11H (Ver.D)
APM30H (Ver.A)

APM30H (Ver.A) and RRUs
APM30H (Ver.A) supplies
APM30

APM30 and the RRUs are
APM30 supplies power to the
BBU and RRUs.

is installed in an APM30H
(Ver.A) and the DBS3900 of
an APM30 cabinet. For
details, see Scenario Where
the BBU Is Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.A)/APM30,
which uses an APM30H
(Ver.A) as an example.

11
DBS3900
Remarks
TP48600A
The BBU is installed in a

TP48600A and the RRUs are
TP48600A supplies power to
the BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in a
TP48600A Cabinet
OMB

OMB and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The OMB
and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an OMB
OMB (Ver.C)

OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs
OMB (Ver.C) supplies

(Ver.C)
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE
APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are referred to as APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H
(Ver.C)are referred to as TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
cabinet are as follows:
l
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs.
An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of six RRUs.
An APM30H supports only one TMC11H and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or

IBBS200Ts.
A maximum of 6 RRU power cables and 12 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out
from an APM30H.
An APM30H or TMC11H cabinet can be installed on the ground or stacked on an

IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked
under a TMC11H.
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right, and auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on the left. If
both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is
positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on
the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. If space
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets in the reverse
way of the base station deployment scenario.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

12
DBS3900
A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in
the APM30H cabinet. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The
BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left side.
Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacit
y
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
Cabinet Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No
backup
power
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
The
number
of
IBBS200
Ds or
IBBS200
Ts is the
same as
that of
APM30H
s in the
initial
configura
tion
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
The
number
of
IBBS200
Ds or
IBBS200
Ts is two
times that
of
APM30H
s in the
initial
configura
tion
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

13
DBS3900
When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
When the number of storage battery cabinets are the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 2-2.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

14
DBS3900
Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when the number
of storage battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-3.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

15
DBS3900
of storage battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the main
APM30H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H, which is on
the right side.
Table 2-3 describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet
Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
The number
of
IBBS200Ds
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

16
DBS3900
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configura
tion
Cabinet
Configuration
or
IBBS200Ts
is the same as
that of
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
The number
of
IBBS200Ds
or
IBBS200Ts
is two times
that of
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
21 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H
+4 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
When no backup power is required in a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure
2-4.
Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

17
DBS3900
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-5.
Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts is the same as that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-6.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

18
DBS3900
Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts is two times that of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE
APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H
l
An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
An APM30H supports only one TMC11H cabinet and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or
IBBS200Ts.
A maximum of 12 RRU power cables and 24 dual-wire fiber optic cables can be routed out
from an APM30H.
An APM30H or TMC11H cabinet can be installed on the ground or stacked on an

IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked
under a TMC11H.
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right side, and
auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are positioned on
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

19
DBS3900
the left side. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery
cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is
stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.
l
future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and
new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion.
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can be

connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24
groups of 2-wire fiber optical cables. When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs,
another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H.
the APM30H.
When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

20
DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base station
deployment
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station
with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in the following figure.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

21
DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

22
DBS3900
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs during base station
deployment
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
with different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment,
and carrier configurations.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configur
ation
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power.
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
4U
12
RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

23
DBS3900
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configur
ation
15 U
12
RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1

TMC11H
The number
of
IBBS200D
s or
IBBS200Ts
is the same
as the
number of
APM30Hs
in the initial
configurati
on.
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
4U
12
RRUs

IBBS200D/IBBS200T
15 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
l The
number
of
IBBS20
0Ds or
IBBS20
0Ts is
twice
the
number
of
APM30
Hs in the
initial
configur
ation.
5U
6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
16 U
6 RRUs
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T
4U
12
RRUs
l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU)

+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
l The
number
of
IBBS70
0Ds or
IBBS70
0Ts is
the
same as
the
number
of
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

24
DBS3900
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
APM30
Hs
during
base
station
deploy
ment.
Space
for
Custom
er
Equipm
ent
Carrier
Configur
ation
15 U
12
RRUs

+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
NOTE
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial site
construction, and the site is configured with more than six RRUs, the IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be
configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 92 Ah storage batteries to avoid overcurrent of a
single battery pack during the discharging.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The BBUs are installed as follows:
l
When two BBUs are configured in the initial site construction, the BBUs are installed in
an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.
During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU
is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.
When a triple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the
position of BBU0 in the following figure.
When no backup power is required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base
station with different requirements of space required for customer equipment are shown in the
following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new site
deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

25
DBS3900
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station without backup power
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
shown in the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios
of new site deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

26
DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial
configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
the following figure. Illustrations a and b in the following figure show the scenarios of new site
deployment, and illustration c shows the scenarios of capacity expansion.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

27
DBS3900
of IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts is twice the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are
shown in the following figure.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

28
DBS3900
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as the number of APM30Hs in the initial configuration
The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different requirements of backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and
carrier configurations.
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Custome
r
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configur
ation
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power.
2U
12
RRUs
1 APM30H (with one DCDU)
13 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H
2U
12
RRUs

IBBS200D/IBBS200T
The number of
IBBS200Ds
or IBBS200Ts
is the same as
the number of
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

29
DBS3900
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Custome
r
Equipme
nt
Carrier
Configur
ation
APM30Hs in
the initial
configuration.
13 U
12
RRUs

TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
l The
number of
IBBS200
Ds or
IBBS200T
s is twice
the
number of
APM30Hs
in the
initial
configurati
on.
2U
12
RRUs

+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
13 U
12
RRUs

+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/
IBBS200Ts
+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/
IBBS700T
l The
number of
IBBS700
Ds or
IBBS700T
s is the
same as
the
number of
APM30Hs
in the
initial
configurati
on.
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30H (Ver.A)/APM30

NOTE
l In this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A).

l The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single- or dual-mode scenario.
A single APM can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
A single APM can be installed together with only one TMC and a maximum of one
integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric
cooling unit.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

30
DBS3900
A maximum of six power cables and twelve dual-wire fiber optic cables can be led out
from a single APM.
An APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on a battery cabinet.
A BBC or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked below
a TMC. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. The BBC or IBBS200T is stacked below
the TMC.
During base station deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and auxiliary
cabinets such as the battery cabinet and TMC, if required, are positioned on the left. If both
the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned
on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet
or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse
the APM. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed in
the basic APM, which is on the left.
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet
Configuration
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No backup
power
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM+1 TMC
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs+1
TMC
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM+1 BBC/
IBBS
16 U
6 RRUs
1 APM+1 BBC/
IBBS+1 TMC
12 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs+2
BBCs/IBBSs
23 U
12 RRUs
2 APMs+2
BBCs/IBBSs+1
TMC
0.5 h or 2 h
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

31
DBS3900
In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is not required
When 0.5 h or 2 h backup power is required, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode
base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-16.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

32
DBS3900
Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when 0.5 h or 2 h
backup power is required
BBU Installed in a TP48600A Cabinet

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A
l
A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinet side by
side.
A TP48600A cabinet can be installed together with an IBBS700D/IBBS700T cabinet side

by side.
A TP48600A can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
In a single- or dual-mode base station, one BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the direct
current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) in the equipment compartment. Table 2-7 lists the
cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements for
backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

33
DBS3900

Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No storage
battery
cabinet is
configured
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
The number
of
IBBS700Ds
or
IBBS700Ts
is the same
as that of
TP48600As
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for
customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-17.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

34
DBS3900
Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storage
battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial
configuration, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of
different space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-18.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

35
DBS3900
of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration
In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required. BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under
the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment, and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under
BBU 0. Table 2-8 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different
requirements for backup power, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
110 V AC or
220 V AC
No storage
battery
cabinet is
configured
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)

36
DBS3900
Power
Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t
Carrier
Configura
tion
The number
of
IBBS700Ds
or
IBBS700Ts
is the same
as that of
TP48600As
in the initial
configuratio
n
5U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D
16 U
12
RRUs
1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H
(Ver.C)
When no storage battery cabinet is configured in the initial configuration, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer
equipment are shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with backup power of 48 V
and 300 Ah
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

37
DBS3900
When the number of IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial
configuration, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when the number of
IBBS700Ds or IBBS700Ts is the same as that of TP48600As in the initial configuration

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB are as
follows:
l
An OMB supplies power to an RRU.
An RRU can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, U-steel, or other objects.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown
in Figure 2-21.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

38
DBS3900
Figure 2-21 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
are as follows:
l
An OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of six RRUs.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
is shown in Figure 2-22.
(Ver.C)
2.2 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

Table 2-9 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied
with DC power.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

39
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Remarks
TMC11H (Ver.C)

TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies
TMC11H (Ver.B)

TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies
The same installation method

is used for the DBS3900 of
a TMC11H (Ver.B) and the
is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.C). For details, see BBU
Installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cabinet, which uses a
TMC11H (Ver.C) as an
example.
TMC11H (Ver.D)

TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies
BBU Installed in a
TMC11H (Ver.D)
TMC11H (Ver.A)

TMC11H (Ver.A) and RRUs
TMC11H (Ver.A) supplies
TMC

TMC and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The TMC
and RRUs.

is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.A) and the DBS3900 of
a TMC. For details, see
Scenario Where the BBU Is
Installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.A)/TMC, which uses a
TMC11H (Ver.A) as an
example.
APM30H (Ver.B) supplied

with +24 V DC power

APM30H (Ver.B) supplied
with +24 V DC power and
RRUs are installed remotely.
The APM30H (Ver.B)
and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an
APM30H (Ver.B) Cabinet
Supplied with +24 V DC
Power
OMB

OMB and the RRUs are
installed remotely. The OMB
and RRUs.

40
DBS3900
Remarks
OMB (Ver.C)

OMB (Ver.C) and the RRUs
OMB (Ver.C) supplies

(Ver.C)
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C) Cabinet

NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C) are referred to as TMC11H.
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinet
are as follows:
l
A single TMC11H can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
A maximum of 12 power cables and 24 dual-wire optical cables can be led out from a single
TMC11H.
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way
of the base station deployment scenario.
the TMC11H cabinet.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in
Table 2-10.
Power
Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
8U
12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Figure 2-23.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

41
DBS3900
Figure 2-23 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario
Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed
in the main TMC11H cabinet, which is on the left. BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H
cabinet, which is on the right.
When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Table 2-11.
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
18 U
12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs
shown in Figure 2-24.
Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

NOTE
TMC11H (Ver.D) is referred to as TMC11H.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

42
DBS3900
The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H cabinet
are as follows:
l
A single TMC11H can supply power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
TMC11H.
is insufficient, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse way
of the base station deployment scenario.
the TMC11H cabinet.
Table 2-12.
Power
Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)
8U
12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)
Figure 2-25.
scenario
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, and the BBUs are installed as follows:
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

43
DBS3900
In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a
TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is
installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the
BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input).
Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).
shown in Table 2-13.
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
-48 V DC
6U
12 RRUs
1 TMC11H (with two

DCDUs)
17 U
12 RRUs
2 TMC11Hs (with two

DCDUs)
shown in Figure 2-26. In Figure 2-26, illustrations a and b show the site deployment scenario
and illustration c shows the capacity expansion scenario, respectively.
Figure 2-26 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

44
DBS3900
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.A)/TMC

NOTE
In this section, the TMC is TMC or TMC11H (Ver. A).
A single TMC can provide power to a maximum of 12 RRUs.
TMC.
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets in the reverse
the TMC. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two TMCs are required. The BBU is installed in
the basic TMC, which is on the left.
Power Supply
Backup
Power
Capacity
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configuration
Cabinet
Configuration
-48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
1 TMC (with
one DCDU)
8U
12 RRUs
1 TMC (with
two DCDUs)
Figure 2-27.
scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

45
DBS3900
BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Cabinet Supplied with +24 V DC Power

When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with +24 V
DC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.
Table 2-15 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with
+24 V DC power.
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
+24 V DC
5U
6 RRUs
1 APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)
Figure 2-28 shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied
with +24 V DC power.
Figure 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the +24 V DC
scenario
Table 2-16 lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with
+24 V DC power.
Power Supply
Space for
Customer
Equipment
Carrier
Configurati
on
+24 V DC
10 U
12 RRUs
2 APM30Hs (Ver.B, +24 V)
When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

46
DBS3900
Figure 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC scenario

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB are as
follows:
l
An OMB supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of three RRUs.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown
in Figure 2-30.
BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
are as follows:
l
An OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to a BBU and a maximum of six RRUs.
The cabinet configuration for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)
is shown in Figure 2-31.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

47
DBS3900
(Ver.C)
2.3 Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

This section describes the scenario where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
power supply.
Table 2-17 lists the scenarios where the BBU in the DBS3900 is installed indoors with AC
power supply.
BBU
Installation
Position
Reference
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03

and the RRUs are installed remotely.
The IMB03 supplies power to the
BBU and RRUs.
BBU Installed in an IMB03
IFS06
The BBU is installed in an IMB03.

The IMB03 and RRUs are installed
in an IFS06.
For details, see the DBS3900 (ICR)

Installation Guide.
BBU Installed in an IMB03

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is provided, a BBU can be installed in an IMB03 and an
RRU can be remotely installed. In this scenario, the IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and
RRU, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

48
DBS3900
Figure 2-32 BBU installed in an IMB03
2.4 Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

This section describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is
Table 2-18 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied
with DC power.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
BBU
Installation
Position
Reference
19-inch rack
The BBU and the DCDU-03B or

DCDU-11B are installed in a 19-inch
rack, and the RRUs are remotely
installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B
or DCDU-11B supplies power to the
BBU and outdoor RRUs.
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack
Wall
The BBU and DCDU-03B or

DCDU-11B are installed on a wall,
and the RRUs are remotely installed
outdoors. The DCDU-03B or
DCDU-11B supplies power to the
BBU and outdoor RRUs.
BBU installed on a wall

49
DBS3900
BBU
Installation
Position
Reference
Indoor
The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs

are remotely installed outdoors. The
APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H
(Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)
supplies power only to the RRUs and
monitors only the RRUs.
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs

Installed Outdoors (Powered by
an APM30H)
IMB03
The BBU is installed in an IMB03

and the RRUs are installed remotely
outdoors. The IMB03 supplies
BBU installed in an IMB03
IFS06
The BBU is installed in an IMB03.

The IMB03 and RRUs are installed
in an IFS06.
For details, see the DBS3900 (ICR)

Installation Guide.
BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B can be installed
in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B
or DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.
Figure 2-33 lists the configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

50
DBS3900
Figure 2-33 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-34 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

51
DBS3900
Figure 2-34 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
BBU installed on a wall

When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B can be installed
indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B
or DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in Figure 2-35.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

52
DBS3900
Figure 2-35 BBU installed on a wall
BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)

When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed
outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),
APM30H (Ver.D). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D) can be
supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. Figure 2-36 shows the installation scenarios.
Figure 2-36 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

53
DBS3900
BBU installed in an IMB03

When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power
to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 BBU installed in an IMB03
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

54
DBS3900
Functional Modules in the DBS3900
About This Chapter

This chapter describes functional modules in the DBS3900.
3.1 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
3.3 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
3.4 WGRU
The WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information
and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock
signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS
positioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each base
station can be configured with a WGRU.
3.5 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet
and reports related alarms.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

55
DBS3900
3.1 BBU3900
This section presents the exterior of the BBU3900 and describes the boards in the BBU3900 and
their panels, functions, indicators, ports, and engineering specifications.
3.1.1 BBU3900
The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions of the BBU3900 are 86 mm x 442 mm x 310 mm (3.39 in. x 17.4 in. x 12.2 in.)
(H x W x D), as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is a unique identifier of a Network Element (NE). It is used
during base station commissioning.
l
If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the label and a mounting
ear of the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 ESN (1)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a mounting ear of
the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-3.
56
DBS3900
Figure 3-3 ESN (2)
3.1.2 BBU3900 Functions

The BBU3900 is a baseband processing unit. It processes the baseband signals of the base station.
The BBU3900 performs the following functions:
l
Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC or RNC.
Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Provides USB(1) ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration
data can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 to operate
and maintain the base station.
Processes uplink and downlink data.
Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing.
Provides the system clock.

NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
3.1.3 BBU3900 Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of the BBU, which include capacity,
transmission ports, input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment
specifications, and surge protection specifications.
For details about technical specifications of a BBU3900, see section "BBU3900 Technical
Specifications" in the 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.
3.1.4 BBU3900 Slot Assignment

This section describes the slot assignment principles for BBU boards in the following scenarios:
BBU3900 GSM, BBU3900 UMTS, BBU3900 LTE, BBU3900 GSM+UMTS (GU for short),
BBU3900 GSM+LTE (GL for short), BBU3900 UMTS+LTE (UL for short), BBU3900 GU+L
(BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GL+U (BBU not interconnected), BBU3900 GU+L
(UCIU+UMPT), BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

57
DBS3900
Slots in the BBU3900

Slots in the BBU3900 are the same in different scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Slots in the BBU3900
BBU3900 GSM
Table 3-1 lists the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM.
Table 3-1 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GSM
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
GTMU
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It must be
configured in
slot 6, with both
slots 5 and 6
occupied.
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It must be
configured in
slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is referentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

58
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UCIU
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 3-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GSM.

Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GSM
BBU3900 UMTS
Table 3-2 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS.
Table 3-2 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UMTS
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single UMPT
or WMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

59
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
The slot
assignment
principles for
the WBBP
boards are as
follows:
l The WBBPd
or WBBPf is
preferentiall
y configured
in slot 3 or 2.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence
over the
WBBPd in
slot
assignment.
l If five or
more
WBBPs are
required,
ensure that a
WBBP is
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

60
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
installed in
each of slots
2 and 3. At
least one of
the WBBPs
in slots 2 and
3 is WBBPd
or WBBPf.
l If both slots
2 and 3 are
occupied by
the WBBPa
or WBBPb
boards,
exchange
boards to
ensure that
the WBBPd
or WBBPf is
configured
in slot 3 or 2.
l If the
WBBPf4 is
installed in
the same
BBU as the
WBBPf1,
WBBPf2,
and
WBBPf3,
the WBBPf4
is
preferentiall
y installed in
slots 2 and 3.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It must be
configured in
slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18

61
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or
6
A single UTRP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
If several
UTRPs are
configured, the
priority of them
as following:
UTRPc,
UTRP6,
UTRP9,
UTRP2,
UTRP3/UTRP4
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
Figure 3-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UMTS.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

62
DBS3900
Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UMTS
BBU3900 LTE
Table 3-3 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE.
Table 3-3 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 LTE
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single LMPT
or UMPT is
preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.
FAN
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Mandatory
Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.
63
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
A single USCU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.
Figure 3-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 LTE.

Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 LTE
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

64
DBS3900
BBU3900 GU
Table 3-4 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU.
Table 3-4 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GU
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
65
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 4
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
or 4.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

66
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 3-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GU.

Figure 3-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GU
BBU3900 GL
Table 3-5 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

67
DBS3900
Table 3-5 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 GL
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 4
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
or 4.
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

68
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, or 4
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 3-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 GL.

Figure 3-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 GL
BBU3900 UL
Table 3-6 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.
Table 3-6 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6
It is configured
only in slot 6.
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.

69
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or
5
A single LBBP
is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or
5
A single WBBP
is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18

70
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
Figure 3-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 UL.

Figure 3-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 UL
BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GU describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GU mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 LTE describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the LTE mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

BBU3900 GL describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting the
GL mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

71
DBS3900
BBU3900 UMTS describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU supporting
the UMTS mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (BBUs not interconnected).
BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-7 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+L (UCIU+UMPT).
Table 3-7 Slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
72
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 3
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that two WBBPs
are installed in
slots 2 and 3. At
least one of the
two WBBPs is
WBBPd.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18

73
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
UCIU
Mandatory
Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5
The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-8 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the LTE
mode.
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single UMPT
is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, 0,
4, or 5.
FAN
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Mandatory
Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.
74
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
A single USCU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 5. A USCU
that occupies 1
U space is
configured in
slot 5 (with both
slots 5 and 4
occupied).
If slots 4 and 5
are occupied, a
USCU is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1, or a
USCU that uses
a dual-satellite
card is
configured in
slot 1, with both
slots 1 and 0
occupied.
NOTE
The UCIU, UTRP, and USCU are configured in descending order of priority.
BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-9 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GL
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GL+U (UCIU+UMPT).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

75
DBS3900

Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
LMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
The UMPT
must be
configured as
the main control
board in the
UCIU+UMPT
cascading
scenario.
GTMU
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6
It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0 to slot 3
A single LBBP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 3.
If more LBBPs
are required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 1, 2, or
0.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18

76
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
UCIU
Mandatory
Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5
The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-10 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU1 supporting the
UMTS mode.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

77
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6 or 7
A single UMPT
is preferentially
configured in
slot 7.

78
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, 2,
4, or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

79
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It must be
configured in
slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, 5, or
6
A single UTRP
is preferentially
configured in
slot 4. If more
UTRPs are
required, the
UTRP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, 1,
or 6.
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 1.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
NOTE
BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT)

Table 3-11 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in BBU0 supporting the GU
mode in the scenario of BBU3900 GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

80
DBS3900

Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WMPT/UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
The WMPT or
UMPT is
configured only
in slot 7.
The UMPT and
WMPT cannot
be configured
simultaneously.
GTMU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Mandatory
Slots 5 and 6

It is configured
only in slot 6
(with slots 5 and
6 occupied).
81
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0 to slot 3
It is configured
in slot 3 by
default.
l If more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3 or 2.
l If no more
CPRI ports
are required,
the WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of
priority, in
slot 3, 0, 1, or
2.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3 or 2.
If five or more
WBBPs are
required, ensure
that a WBBP is
installed in each
of slots 2 and 3.
At least one of
the WBBPs in
slots 2 and 3 is
WBBPd or
WBBPf.
The WBBPf
takes
precedence over
the WBBPd
during slot
assignment.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

82
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
FAN
Mandatory
Slot 16
It is configured
only in slot 16.
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
The UTRP in
GSM mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
UMTS mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 0.
When
configured with
two satellite
cards, it is
configured in
slot 1 (with both
slots 0 and 1
occupied).
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
UCIU
Mandatory
Slot 0, Slot 1,
Slot 4, or slot 5
The UCIU is
installed in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 4, 5, 0, or
1.
Table 3-12 describes the slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

83
DBS3900
Table 3-12 Slot assignment principles for the boards in the BBU3900 UL
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 6
It is configured
only in slot 6.
UMPT
Mandatory
Slot 7
It is configured
only in slot 7.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or
5
A single LBBP
is configured
only in slot 2. If
more LBBPs are
required, the
LBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 1, 0, 4,
or 5.
WBBP
Mandatory
Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or
5
A single WBBP
is configured
only in slot 3. If
more WBBPs
are required, the
WBBP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 3, 0, 1, 4,
or 5.
If a WBBPd or
WBBPf is
required, it is
configured only
in slot 3.
The WBBP,
which provides
a maximum of
six CPRI ports,
is configured in
either slot 2 or
slot 3.
FAN
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Mandatory
Slot 16

It is configured
only in slot 16.
84
DBS3900
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Number
Slot
Restriction
UPEU
Mandatory
Slot 18 or 19
A single UPEU
is preferentially
configured in
slot 19.
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
UTRP
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
The UTRP in
UMTS mode
takes
precedence over
the UTRP in
LTE mode
during slot
assignment.
USCU
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is
preferentially
configured in
slot 4.
NOTE
3.1.5 WMPT
The WCDMA main processing and transmission unit (WMPT) processes signals for the
BBU3900 and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-13 lists the WMPT specifications.
Table 3-13 WMPT specifications
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
WMPT
UMTS
ATM over
E1/T1 or IP
over E1/T1
Four
channels
Full-duplex

85
DBS3900
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
Transmissio
n over FE
optical ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
NOTE
For the combined signaling specifications of the WMPT, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-11 shows the panel of the WMPT.
Figure 3-11 WMPT panel
Functions
The WMPT performs the following functions:
l
Performs functions such as configuration management, equipment management,

performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active and standby switchover, and
provides OM channel to communicate with the LMT or M2000.
Provides a reference clock for the system.
Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900.
Provides USB ports. A USB flash drive that stores required software and configuration data
can be inserted into the USB port to perform the automatic base station upgrade.
Provides a 4-channel E1/T1 port over ATM or IP.
Provides an FE electrical port and an FE optical port over IP.
Indicators
Table 3-14 describes the indicators on the WMPT panel.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

86
DBS3900
Table 3-14 Indicators on the WMPT panel

Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the board
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the board
is faulty.
On for 1s and off for

1s
The board is
functioning properly.
On for 0.125s and off

for 0.125s
l Data or software
is being loaded to
the board.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board must be
replaced.
Steady off
The board is running

properly.

1s
An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
fault before deciding
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
The board serves as

an active board.
Steady off
l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.

for 0.125s
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

The operation and

maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.
87
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description

1s
The board is being

tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(2)(3) flash
drive.
In addition to the preceding three indicators, there are six indicators on the board panel, which
indicate the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning
Ethernet port. The six indicators do not have silkscreen on the WMPT panel, whereas they are
at both sides of the corresponding ports, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Port status indicators on the WMPT panel
Table 3-15 describes the port status indicators on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-15 Port status indicators
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
FE1 optical port

status indicators
Green (LINK on the

left side)
Steady on
The connection is set

up successfully.
Steady off
No connection is set
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on

up successfully.
Orange (ACT on the

right side)
FE0 electrical port

status indicators
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Green (LINK on the

left side)

88
DBS3900
Indicator
Color
Orange (ACT on the

right side)
ETH port indicators
Green (LINK on the

left side)
Orange (ACT on the

right side)
Status
Description
Steady off
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on

up successfully.
Steady off
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Ports
Table 3-16 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
Table 3-16 Ports on the WMPT panel
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
E1/T1 port
DB26 female connector
E1/T1 port
FE0
RJ45 connector
FE electrical port
FE1
SFP female connector
FE optical port
GPS
SMA connector
Reserved
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Commissioning
TST(2)
USB connector
USB commissioning port
USB(3)
USB connector
USB loading port
RST
Used for resetting the WMPT

89
DBS3900

NOTE
(1) Before accessing the base station through the ETH port, ensure that an OM port has been opened and
the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port.
(2) The TST port is used for commissioning the base station rather than importing or exporting the base
station configuration.
(3) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption.
DIP Switch
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 and SW2. SW1 is used to set the work mode of the E1/
T1 signal cable, and SW2 is used to set the resistance of the four E1/T1 signal cables in different
modes. Figure 3-13 shows the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Figure 3-13 DIP switch settings of the WMPT
Table 3-17 and Table 3-18 list the DIP switch settings of the WMPT.
Table 3-17 Settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the WMPT
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
DIP
Switch
DIP Status
Description
SW1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
T1
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
The E1
resistance is
set to 120
ohm.
ON
ON
ON
ON
The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.

90
DBS3900
DIP
Switch
DIP Status
1
Description
2
Others
Unavailable
Table 3-18 Settings of the DIP switch SW2 on the WMPT

DIP
Switch
DIP Status
Description
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Imbalanced
Others
Unavailable
3.1.6 UMPT
The universal main processing and transmission unit (UMPT) processes signals and manages
resources on other boards in the BBU3900.
NOTE
UMPTb1 is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC370 and later versions.
Specifications of the UMPT

The UMPT is classified into four types: UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6. Table
3-19 lists the specifications of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6.
Table 3-19 Specifications of the UMPT
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
UMTS
ATM over
E1/T1 or IP
over E1/T1
Four
channels
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
or 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports
100 Mbit/s or
1000 Mbit/s
Full- or halfduplex

91
DBS3900
Board
Applicable
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
UMPTa2/
UMPTa6
LTE
IP over E1/
T1
Four
channels
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
or 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports
100 Mbit/s or
1000 Mbit/s
Full- or halfduplex
The following table describes the signaling specifications of the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working
in LTE mode.
Table 3-20 Signaling specifications
Board
Signaling Specifications (CAPS)
UMPTa2/UMPTa6
60
The following table describes the data radio bearer (DRB) specifications and maximum number
of users supported by the UMPTa2, or UMPTa6 working in LTE mode.
Table 3-21 Data radio bearer specifications
Board
Maximum Number of Users
UMPTa2/UMPTa6
10800
The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the UMPTa2/UMPTa6 working in
LTE mode is three times the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode.
NOTE
For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB or NodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in
3900 Series Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of data radio bearers and
RRC_connected users, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical
Description.
Panel
Figure 3-14, Figure 3-16, Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-17 show the panels of the UMPT boards.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

92
DBS3900
Figure 3-14 UMPTa1 Panel
Figure 3-15 UMPTb1 Panel
NOTE
In the lower left of the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, there are silkscreens UMPTa1,
UMPTb1, UMPTa2, and UMPTa6, respectively, indicating their board types.
Functions
The UMPT performs the following functions:
l
Performs configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,

signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.
Controls all boards in the system.
Provides the reference clock for the entire system.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

93
DBS3900
Implements transmission and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second (PPS) reference
clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.
Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission in compliance
with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP), and Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.
Ports
Table 3-22 describes the ports on the UMPT.
Table 3-22 Ports on the UMPT
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
FE/GE1
SFP female
connector
A 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive Ethernet

optical port is used for transmitting service data
and signaling messages.
FE/GE0
RJ45 connector
A 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, or 1000 Mbit/s adaptive

Ethernet electrical port is used for transmitting
service data and signaling messages.
USB(1)
USB connector
The USB port with the USB silkscreen is used for

the software upgrade of a base station using a USB
flash driver. This port also functions as a
commissioning Ethernet port(2).
The USB port with the CLK silkscreen functions
as the TOD clock or test clock port.
E1/T1
DB26 female
connector
The port is used for four E1/T1 signal inputs and

outputs between the UMPT and universal E1/T1
lightning protection unit (UELP) or between base
station controllers.
GPS
SMA connector
The GPS port on the UMPTa1, UMPTb1, or

UMPTa2 is reserved.
The GPS port on the UMPTa6 is used for
transmitting radio frequency (RF) signals
received from the antenna to the satellite card.
CI
SFP female
connector
The port is used for BBU interconnection.
RST
The port is used to reset the board.
NOTE

(2) When the USB port functions as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an OM port has been opened
and the user has obtained required authorities for accessing the base station through the OM port before
accessing the base station through the USB port.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

94
DBS3900
Indicators
Table 3-23 describes the indicators on the UMPT.
Table 3-23 Indicators on the UMPT
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
is faulty.

1s
The board is

for 0.125s
l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off

properly.

1s
An alarm is
generated, and you
need to locate the
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
The board serves as

an active board.
Steady off
l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

95
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description

for 0.125s
The operation and

maintenance link
(OML) is
disconnected.

1s
The board is being

tested, such as an
RRU Voltage
Standing Wave Ratio
(VSWR) test through
a USB(1) flash drive.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa1 has
this status.
In every 4s, the

indicator is on for
0.125s and off for
0.125s (eight times)
in the first 2s and then
off for 2s.
l All cells
corresponding to
the subrack that
houses this board
are not activated.
l The S1 link is
faulty.
NOTE
Of UMPT boards,
only the UMPTa2 and
UMPTa6 have this
status.
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators indicate the connection status of
the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1 port. The
indicators on the FE/GE optical port, FE/GE electrical port, interconnection port, and E1/T1
port, which have no silkscreen on the boards, are near the corresponding port, as shown in Figure
3-18.
Figure 3-18 Indicators for ports
Table 3-24 describes the indicators.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

96
DBS3900
Table 3-24 Indicators for ports

Indicator/
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Definition
LINK (silkscreen for

the optical port)
Green
Steady on
The connection is
normal.
Steady off
The connection is
abnormal.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted.
Steady on
The connection is
normal.
Steady off
The connection is
abnormal.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted.
Steady green
The interconnection
link is normal.
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive
signals because of
one of the following
reasons:
ACT (silkscreen for

the optical port)
LINK (silkscreen for

the electrical port)
ACT (silkscreen for

the electrical port)
CI
Orange
Green
Orange
Red or green
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The optical cable
is broken.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

97
DBS3900
Indicator/
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Definition
Blinking red (on for

0.125s and off for
0.125s)
Cables are connected

in one of following
incorrect manners:
l In the UCIU
+UMPT scenario,
the S0 port on the
UCIU is
connected to the
CI port on the
UMPT.
Indicators for the
S0 and CI ports
are blinking.
l The ports are
connected in ring
topology.
Indicators for all
incorrectly
connected ports
are blinking.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Steady off
The optical module

cannot be detected.
R0, R1, R2
Red or green
Reserved
L01
Red or green
Steady off
E1/T1 link 0 and 1 is

not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Steady green
E1/T1 links 0 and 1

are working
properly.
Blinking green (on

for 1s and off for 1s)
E1/T1 link 0 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 1 is
not set up or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Blinking green (on

for 0.125s and off for
0.125s)
E1/T1 link 1 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 0 is
alarm is generated.
Steady red
Alarms are generated

on E1/T1 links 0 and
1.

98
DBS3900
Indicator/
Silkscreen
L23
Color
Red or green
Status
Definition

1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 0.

0.125s and off for
0.125s)
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 1.
Steady off
E1/T1 link 2 and 3 is

not set up, or an LOS
alarm is generated.
Steady green
E1/T1 links 2 and 3

are working
properly.
Blinking green (on

E1/T1 link 2 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 3 is
alarm is generated.
Blinking green (on

0.125s)
E1/T1 link 3 is
working properly,
but E1/T1 link 2 is
alarm is generated.
Steady red
Alarms are generated

on E1/T1 links 2 and
3.

1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 2.

0.125s and off for
0.125s)
An alarm is
generated on E1/T1
link 3.
DIP Switch
Two DIP switches on the UMPT are labeled SW1 and SW2. Figure 3-19 shows the positions
of DIP switches on the UMPT.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

99
DBS3900
Figure 3-19 Positions of DIP switches on the UMPT
Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:
l
SW1 is used to select the E1/T1 mode. Table 3-25 describes the DIP switch.
SW2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission. Table 3-26 describes the
DIP switch.
Table 3-25 DIP switch SW1

DIP
Switch
DIP Status
Description
SW1
ON
ON
Reserved
Reserved
OFF
ON
The E1 resistance is set to

120 ohms.
ON
OFF
The T1 resistance is set to

100 ohms.

75 ohms.
Table 3-26 DIP switch SW2

DIP
Switch
DIP Status
Description
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Unbalanced
3.1.7 GTMU
The GSM transmission and timing and management unit (GTMU) is the basic transmission and
control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and
external alarm collection port, monitors the power, controls and manages the entire BTS.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

100
DBS3900
Specifications
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Table 3-27 lists the transmission
specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-27 Transmission specifications of the GTMU
Board
Supported
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
GTMU/
GTMUb
GSM
TDM over
E1/T1
Four
channels
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE
optical ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s
and 100
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Table 3-28 lists the TRX specifications of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Table 3-28 TRX specifications of the GTMU
Board
Supported Mode
Transmission
Mode
Maximum Carrier
Number
GTMU
GSM
TDM
72
IP over FE or IP over
E1
36
TDM
126
IP over FE
60
IP over E1
48
GTMUb
GSM
Panel
Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
Figure 3-20 GTMU panel
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

101
DBS3900
Figure 3-21 GTMUb panel
Functions
The GTMU performs the following functions:
l
Controls, maintains, and operates the base station.
Supports fault management, configuration management, performance management, and

security management.
Monitors the fans and power modules.
Provides and manages the clock of the base station in centralized mode.
Provides the clock output for test.
Provides a port for maintenance on the OM system.
Supports the transmission of four paths of E1 signals and two paths of FE signals.
Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs.
Indicators
Table 3-29 describes the indicators on the GTMU.
Table 3-29 Indicators on the GTMU
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but the

board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply, or the

board is faulty.

1s
The board is running properly.

for 0.125s
Software is being loaded to the

board.
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and the

board must be replaced.
ALM
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Red

102
DBS3900
Silkscreen
ACT
Color
Green
Status
Description
Steady off
There is no fault.

1s
An alarm is generated and you

need to locate the fault before
deciding whether to replace the
board.
Steady on
The board serves as an active

board.

for 0.125s
The OML is disconnected.
Besides the preceding three indicators, there are some other indicators on the board, indicating
the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port, and commissioning
port. They are near the corresponding ports and have no silkscreen. Table 3-30 describes the
indicators.
Table 3-30 Indicators for ports
Indicator
Color
Status
Description
LIU0 to LIU3
Green
Steady on
An E1/T1 local alarm

is generated.

1s
An E1/T1 remote
alarm is generated.
Steady off
The link is
functional.
Steady green
The CPRI link is

Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
CPRI0 to CPRI5
Red or green
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

103
DBS3900
Indicator
Color
Status
Description

1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is out

of lock because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between dualmode clock
sources.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over CPRI
ports.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
ETH
FE0
FE1 (on the

GTMUb)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Green (LINK
indicator on the left
side)
Steady on

up successfully.
Steady off
up.
Orange (ACT
indicator on the right
side)
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Green (LINK
side)
Steady on

up successfully.
Steady off
up.
Orange (ACT
side)
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on

up successfully.
Green (LINK
side)

104
DBS3900
Indicator
Color
Green (ACT
side)
Status
Description
Steady off
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
M_S (on the

GTMUb)
This is the indicator

for the reserved port.
EXT (on the

GTMUb)
This is the indicator

for the reserved port.
Ports
Table 3-31 describes the ports on the GTMU.
Table 3-31 Ports on the GTMU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female
connector
Data transmission port interconnected to the RF

module. It supports the input and output of optical
and electrical transmission signals.
EXT (on the

GTMUb)
SFP female
connector
Reserved
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Local maintenance and commissioning port
FE0
RJ45 connector
Connected to the routers in the equipment room

through FE cables to transmit network
information
FE1
DLC connector
Connected to the routers in the equipment room

through fiber optic cables to transmit network
information
TST(2)
USB connector
Providing reference clock for the test instruments
USB(3)
USB connector
Used for automatic software upgrade through the

USB flash drive
E1/T1
DB26 female
connector
Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between

the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs
RST
Used for resetting the GTMU

105
DBS3900

NOTE
The following table lists the specifications of CPRI ports on the GTMU.
Table 3-32 Specifications of the GTMU ports
Board
Number of CPRI
Ports
CPRI Data Rate

(Gbit/s)
Topo Type
GTMU
1.25
Topologies of star,
chain, and ring
GTMUb
1.25/2.5
Topologies of star,
chain, and ring
DIP Switch
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and
S2 need to be set jointly. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:
l
S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 3-33 provides details on the DIP switch.
S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission cables. Table 3-34 provides
details on the DIP switch.
S3 is reserved.
S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 3-35 provides details on the DIP switch.
S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 3-36 provides details
on the DIP switch.
Table 3-33 Description on S1

DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
S1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF

75 ohm.
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

120 ohm.
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
The T1 resistance is set to

100 ohm.
Others
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

Unavailable
106
DBS3900

NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the factory-delivered configuration, without any manual setting on site.
The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
S2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
All the bits are set to

OFF by default in all
modes.
ON
ON
ON
ON
When error codes are

received over the four
E1 RX links in 75 ohm,
all the bits of S2 must
be set to ON to rectify
the faults on the E1
links.
Others
Unavailable

DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
S4
ON
ON
ON
ON
Supporting E1 bypass
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not supporting E1
bypass
Others
Unavailable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
S5
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not supporting E1
bypass
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
of level-1 cascaded
base stations

107
DBS3900
DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
of level-2 cascaded
base stations
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
of level-3 cascaded
BTSs
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
of level-4 cascaded
BTSs
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
of level-5 cascaded
BTSs
3.1.8 LMPT
The LTE main processing and transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in
terms of OM and signaling processing and provides system clock for the BBU3900.
Specifications
Table 3-37 lists the specifications of the LMPT.
Table 3-37 Specifications of the LMPT
Board
Mode
Transmissi
on Mode
Number of
ports
Port
Capacity
Full/HalfDuplex
LMPT
LTE
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE optical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
and 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
Transmissio
n over FE/
GE electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/s,
and 1000
Mbit/s
Full-duplex
The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LMPT.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

108
DBS3900
Table 3-38 Signaling specifications of the LMPT

Board
Signaling Specification (CAPS)
LMPT
30
The following table lists the maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode supported by
the LMPT.
Table 3-39 Maximum number of UEs in RRC_Connected mode
Board
Maximum RRC_Connected Users
LMPT
5400
The maximum of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the LMPT is three times the maximum
number of RRC_connected users.
NOTE
For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900 Series
Base Station Technical Description. For the maximum number of data radio bearers and RRC_connected
users, see section "Baseband Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
Figure 3-22 shows the LMPT.
Figure 3-22 LMPT
Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions:
l
Enables configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,

signaling processing, and radio source management
Controls all boards in the system
Provides the system clock
Enables signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

109
DBS3900
Indicators
There are three indicators on the LMPT panel. Table 3-40 describes the indicators on the LMPT
panel and their status.
Table 3-40 Indicators on the LMPT panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.
On for 1s and off

for 1s
The board is functioning

properly.
On for 0.125s and l Software or data is being

off for 0.125s
loaded to the board.
l The board is not started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is generated, and

the board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off

properly.
On for 1s and off

for 1s
An alarm is generated and

you need to locate the fault
before deciding whether to
replace the board.
Steady on
The board serves as an

active board.
Steady off
l The board does not

serve as an active board.
l The board has not been
activated.
l The board is not
providing any services.
On for 0.125s and The OML is disconnected.

off for 0.125s
In every 4s, the
indicator is on for
0.125s and off for
0.125s (eight
times) in the first
2s and then off for
2s.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

l All cells corresponding

to the subrack that
houses this board are not
activated.
l The S1 link is faulty.
110
DBS3900
Besides the preceding three indicators, some other indicators used for indicating the connection
status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and commissioning Ethernet port have no
silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 3-41 describes the indicators.
Table 3-41 Indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
SFP0 and SFP1
Green (LINK)
Steady on

up successfully.
Steady off
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady on

up successfully.
Steady off
up.
Steady on

up successfully.
Steady off
up.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received.
Orange (ACT)
ETH
Orange (ACT)
Green (LINK)
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
Green (LINK)
Orange (ACT)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

111
DBS3900
Ports
Table 3-42 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
Table 3-42 Ports on the panel of the LMPT
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
SFP0 and SFP1
SFP female
connector
FE/GE optical port

connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment
ETH(1)
RJ45 connector
Commissioning
TST(2)
USB connector
Test port
USB(3)
USB connector
Software loading
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
FE/GE electrical port

connecting to the
transmission
equipment or gateway
equipment
GPS
SMA connector
GPS port
RST
Used for resetting the

LMPT
NOTE
NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not used
simultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they cannot be used
simultaneously.
3.1.9 WBBP
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
NOTE
WBBPf is supported in NodeB V200R014C00SPC320 and later versions.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

112
DBS3900
Specifications
The WBBP falls into four types, as listed in Table 3-43.
NOTE
The WBBP in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Table 3-43 Specifications of the WBBP

Board
Number of Cells
Supported
Number of UL CEs
Number of DL
CEs
WBBPa
128
256
WBBPb1
64
64
WBBPb2
128
128
WBBPb3
256
256
WBBPb4
384
384
WBBPd1
192
192
WBBPd2
384
384
WBBPd3
256
256
WBBPf1
192
256
WBBPf2
256
384
WBBPf3
384
512
WBBPf4
512
768
NOTE
For the combined signaling specifications of the WBBP, see section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description.
Panel
The WBBP has four types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24, Figure 3-25, and
Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-23 Panel of the WBBPa
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

113
DBS3900
Figure 3-24 Panel of the WBBPb
Figure 3-25 Panel of the WBBPd
Figure 3-26 Panel of the WBBPf
NOTE
l The WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 have silkscreens WBBPb1, WBBPb2,
WBBPb3, and WBBPb4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel,
respectively.
l The WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3 have silkscreens WBBPd1, WBBPd2, and WBBPd3
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and WBBPf4 have silkscreens WBBPf1, WBBPf2, WBBPf3, and
WBBPf4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The WBBP performs the following functions:
l
Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules, and supports CPRI ports in 1
+1 backup mode.
Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
When the WBBPd is installed in slot 2 or 3 and is connected to an RF module, the WBBPd
supports the IC of uplink data.
The WBBPf installed in slot 2 or slot 3 supports the baseband interconnection between
BBUs.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

114
DBS3900
Indicators
There are three indicators on the panel of the WBBP. Table 3-44 describes the indicators on the
WBBP and their status.
Table 3-44 Indicators on the panel of the WBBP and their status
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on

board is faulty.
Steady off

board is faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s

properly.
On for 0.125s and off for

0.125s
l Software or data is being

loaded to the board.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on

Steady off

board.
Steady on

board.
Steady off
l The board does not serve as

an active board.
activated.
l The board is not providing
any services.
The power supply for the board

is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of WBBP boards, only
the WBBPf has this status.
The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three indicators indicating the status of Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) links, and the indicators are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd or WBBPf
provides six indicators indicating the status of SFP links, and the indicators are above the SFP
ports.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

115
DBS3900
Table 3-45 describes the indicators.

Table 3-45 CPRI port status indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
The CPRI link is

Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

0.125s and off for
0.125s)
The RF module
connected to the CPRI
link has a hardware
fault.

1s and off for 1s)

of lock because of
following reasons:
l There is no mutual
lock between dualmode clock
sources.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over CPRI
ports.
l VSWR alarms are
generated on the
RF module
connected to the
CPRI link when
the USB(1) flash
drive is used for
VSWR test.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

116
DBS3900

NOTE
(1) The security of the USB port is ensured by encryption. The TST port is used for commissioning the
base station rather than importing or exporting the base station configuration.
The WBBPf provides an indicator indicating the status of the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable
(QSFP) link, and the indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-46 describes this indicator.
Table 3-46 QSFP port status indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
HEI
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU
transmission link is
functional.
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

1s and off for 1s)
The interconnection
link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l There is
mismatched data
rate over QSFP
ports.
Steady off
The optical module

cannot be detected.
Ports
Table 3-47 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

117
DBS3900
Table 3-47 Ports on the WBBPa and WBBPb panels

Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRIx
Data transmission port

interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.
Table 3-48 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd.
Table 3-48 Ports on the WBBPd panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRI0, CPRI1,
CPRI2, CPRI3/
EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,
CPRI5/EIH2

interconnected to the RF module.
It supports the input and output of
optical and electrical
transmission signals.
The WBBPf provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port, as listed in Table 3-49.
Table 3-49 Ports on the WBBPf panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
CPRIx

interconnected to the RF
module. It supports the input
and output of optical and
electrical transmission
signals.
HEI
QSFP connector
Port interconnected to other

baseband boards to share the
baseband resources.
3.1.10 LBBP
The LTE baseband processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Specifications
The following table lists the signaling specifications of the LBBP.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

118
DBS3900
Table 3-50 Signaling specifications of the LBBP

Board
Signaling Specification (CAPS)
LBBPc
30
LBBPd1/LBBPd2/LBBPd3/LBBPd4
60
The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users supported by the LBBP in LTE
FDD scenarios.
Table 3-51 Maximum RRC_connected users
Board
Cell Bandwidth
Maximum RRC_Connected
Users
LBBPc
1.4 MHz
1008
3 MHz
1800
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
1800
15 MHz
1800 (2R)/1200 (4R)
20 MHz
1800 (2R)/1200 (4R)
1.4 MHz
504
3 MHz
1080
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
3600
15 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
1.4 MHz
1008
3 MHz
2160
5 MHz
3600
10 MHz
3600
15 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
LBBPd1/LBBPd2
LBBPd3
The following table lists the maximum RRC_connected users supported by the LBBP in LTE
TDD scenarios.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

119
DBS3900

Board
Cell Bandwidth
Users
LBBPc
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
1800
20 MHz
1800(2R)/1200(4R)
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
LBBPd2
LBBPd4

Board
Cell Bandwidth
Users
LBBPc
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
1800
20 MHz
1800(2R)/1200(4R)
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
3600
15 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
5 MHz
1800
10 MHz
3600
15 MHz
3600
20 MHz
3600
LBBPd2
LBBPd4
The maximum number of data radio bearers (DRBs) supported by the LBBP is three times the
maximum RRC_connected users.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

120
DBS3900

NOTE
For the signaling specifications of an entire eNodeB, see the section "Signaling Specifications" in 3900
Series Base Station Technical Description. For the following specifications, see the section "Baseband
Specifications" in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description: the maximum number of DRBs,
maximum RRC_connected users per cell, maximum RRC_connected users supported by an entire base
station, and maximum uplink and downlink throughput per cell or user.
The following table lists the maximum throughput of the LBBP.

Table 3-54 Maximum throughput of the LBBP
Board
Maximum Throughput
LBBPc
l Downlink: 300 Mbit/s

l Uplink: 100 Mbit/s
LBBPd1

LBBPd2

LBBPd3

LBBPd4
The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios.
Table 3-55 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE FDD scenarios
Board
Number of
Cell
Cell Bandwidth
Antenna Configuration
LBBPc
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10

MHz, 15 MHz, and 20 MHz
3x20 MHz 1T1R

3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
1x20 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd1
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10

3x20 MHz 1T1R

3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

121
DBS3900
Board
Number of
Cell
Cell Bandwidth
LBBPd2
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10

3x20 MHz 1T1R

3x20 MHz 1T2R
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x20 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd3
1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, and

10 MHz
6x10M 1T1R
6x10M 1T2R
6x10M 2T2R
The following table lists the number of cells, bandwidth, and antenna configurations supported
by a single LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios.
Table 3-56 Specifications of the LBBP in LTE TDD scenarios
Board
Number of
Cells
Cell Bandwidth
LBBPc
5 MHz, 10 MHz, and 20 MHz
1x20 MHz (4T4R)

2x10 MHz (2T2R)
3x20 MHz 2T2R
3x10 MHz 4T4R
LBBPd2
LBBPd4
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz,and

20 MHz
3x20 MHz 2T2R
10 MHz, 15 MHz,and 20 MHz
3x20 MHz 8T8R

3x20 MHz 4T4R
122
DBS3900

NOTE
l The "Antenna Configuration" column lists the maximum configurations supported by various types of
LBBPs. For example, the LBBPc supports the maximum configuration of 3x10 MHz 4T4R, and
therefore supports any of the following configurations: 3x1.4 MHz 4T4R, 3x3 MHz 4T4R, and 3x5
MHz 4T4R.
l As long as the maximum antenna configuration is not exceeded, different cells support different antenna
configurations. For example, if an LBBPd2 supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the
three cells connected to the LBBPc can use the following antenna configurations: 2T2R, 2T2R, and
1T1R.
l Boards with the same antenna configuration support combinations of different bandwidth as long as
the total bandwidth does not exceed the maximum bandwidth supported by the board. For example, if
an LBBPc supports the 3x20 MHz 2T2R antenna configuration, the three cells connected to the LBBPc
can use any of the following antenna configurations: 1.4 MHz 2T2R, 3 MHz 2T2R, 5 MHz 2T2R, 10
MHz 2T2R, 15 MHz 2T2R, and 20 MHz 2T2R.
l The LBBP supports CPRI convergence when the site is configured with any of the following RRUs:
RRU3221, RRU3240, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, LRFUe, MRFUd, RRU3229,
RRU3841, RRU3942, RRU3642, RRU3832, RRU3838, and RRU3268. The CPRI convergence of the
LBBP must comply with the following principles:
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only between two
LBBPc boards, and one LBBPc board must be configured in slot 2 or 3.
l In LBBPc+LBBPc CPRI convergence mode, the CPRI convergence is allowed only from multiple
LBBPc boards to one LBBPd board, and only the CPRI ports on the LBBPd in slot 2 or 3 can
connect to RF units.
l For the LBBPc and LBBPd in LTE TDD scenarios, the maximum throughput indicates board hardware
capabilities. The maximum uplink and downlink throughput in actual networking is related to the
subframe configuration type.
Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 3-27 and Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-27 LBBPc panel
Figure 3-28 LBBPd panel
NOTE
The LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and LBBPd4 have silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, and
LBBPd4 indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

123
DBS3900
Functions
The LBBP performs the following functions:
l
Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
Provides CPRI ports for communication with RF modules.
Indicators
On the LBBP panel, there are three indicators, as described in Table 3-57.
Table 3-57 Indicators on the LBBP panel
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on

board is faulty.
Steady off

board is faulty.

properly.

0.125s
l The board is being loaded or

configured.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on

Steady off
An alarm is generated, and you

board.
Steady on

board.
Steady off

an active board.
l The board is not activated.
l The board does not provide
any services.
The power supply for the board

is insufficient.
NOTE
Of all types of LBBP boards, only
the LBBPd has this status.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

124
DBS3900
As listed in Table 3-58, the LBBP provides six indicators indicating the Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) link status. The indicators are positioned above the SFP ports.
Table 3-58 SFP link status indicators
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
The CPRI link is

Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

0.125s and off for
0.125s)
The RF module
connected to the CPRI
link has a hardware
fault.

1s and off for 1s)

following reasons:
sources.
l The data rates of
the CPRI ports do
not match each
other.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
The LBBPd provides an indicator that indicates the Quad Small Form-factor Pluggable (QSFP)
link status. The indicator is above the QSFP port. Table 3-59 describes the indicator.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

125
DBS3900
Table 3-59 QSFP link status indicator

Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
HEI
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU
transmission link is
functional.
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive or
transmit signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

1s and off for 1s)
The interconnection
link is out of lock
because of the
following reasons:
l There is no
mutual lock
between two
interconnected
BBUs.
l The data rates of
the QSFP ports do
not match each
other.
Steady off
The optical module

cannot be detected.
Ports
Table 3-60 describes the six CPRI ports on the LBBP panel.
Table 3-60 LBBP ports
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female
connector
Connected to the RF
modules for
transmitting service
data, clock signals,
and synchronization
information.

126
DBS3900
Table 3-61 describes the QSFP port on the LBBPd panel.

Table 3-61 QSFP port on the LBBPd panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
HEI
QSFP connector
Reserved
3.1.11 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the
fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Panel
The FAN units fall into two types: FAN and FANc, as shown in Figure 3-29 and Figure 3-30.
Figure 3-29 FAN
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

127
DBS3900
Figure 3-30 FANc
NOTE
There is a FANc silkscreen on the FANc while the FAN has no such silkscreen.
Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions:
l
Controls the fan speed.
Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.
Monitors the temperature at the air intake vent.
Dissipates heat.
The FANc provides a read-write electronic label.
Indicator
There is only one indicator on the panel of the FAN unit, which indicates the operating status
of the fans. Table 3-62 describes the indicator.
Table 3-62 Indicator on the panel of the FAN unit
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
STATE
Red or green
Blinking green (on

0.125s)
The module is not

registered, and no
alarm is reported.
Blinking green (on

The module is
working.

1s and off for 1s)
The module is
reporting alarms.

128
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady off
There is no power
supply.
3.1.12 UPEU
The universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48 V
DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.
Panel
The UPEU is classified into four types: universal power and environment interface unit type a
(UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type b (UPEUb), universal power and
environment interface unit type c (UPEUc), and universal power and environment interface unit
type d (UPEUd). The UPEUa, UPEUc, and UPEUd convert -48 V DC power into +12 V DC
power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 3-31, Figure
3-32, Figure 3-33, and Figure 3-34 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, UPEUc, and
UPEUd, respectively.
Figure 3-31 UPEUa panel
(1) BBU power switch
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
(2) 7W2 connector

129
DBS3900
Figure 3-32 UPEUb panel
(2) 7W2 connector
Figure 3-33 UPEUc panel
(2) 3V3 connector
Figure 3-34 UPEUd panel
(2) 3V3 connector
NOTE
The UPEUc and UPEUd have silkscreens "UPEUc" and "UPEUd" indicating their board types on them,
respectively, whereas the UPEUa and UPEUb do not have such silkscreens indicating their board types.
The UPEUa and UPEUb, however, can be distinguished by the silkscreens "-48 V" and "+24 V" on them.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

130
DBS3900
Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l
Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the operating
voltage of the boards.
Provides two ports with each receiving one RS485 signal and another two ports with each
receiving four Boolean signals. The Boolean signals can only be dry contact or Open
Collector (OC) signals.
Table 3-63 describes the specifications.

Table 3-63 Specifications
Board
Output Power
Backup Mode
UPEUa
The output power of a

UPEUa is 300 W.
1+1 backup
UPEUc

UPEUc is 360 W, and the
output power of two UPEUc
boards is 650 W.
1+1 backup
UPEUd

UPEUd is 650 W.
1+1 backup
NOTE
After the UPEUa is replaced by the UPEUc, the UPEU power consumption data monitored by the M2000
will change. The power consumption data does not only depend on the output power but also on the data
collection method. The UPEUc and UPEUa use different methods for collecting power consumption data.
Therefore, the decrease in the power consumption shown in the M2000 after the UPEUa is replaced by the
UPEUc does not necessarily reflect the actual decrease of power consumption.
Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 3-64
describes the indicator.
Table 3-64 Indicator on the UPEU panel
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
The board is
functional.
Steady off
There is no power
is faulty.

131
DBS3900
Port
The UPEU provides two RS485 signal ports, each receiving one RS485 signal, and two Boolean
signal ports, each receiving four Boolean signals. Figure 3-35 shows the slots in the BBU.
Figure 3-35 Slots in the BBU
Table 3-65 describes the ports on the UPEU panel.

Table 3-65 Description on the ports
Slot
Silkscree
n
Connecto
r
Quantity
Description
Slot 19
+24 V or
-48 V
3V3 or
7W2
connector
Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power
EXTALM0
RJ45
connector
Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3
EXTALM1
RJ45
connector
MON0
RJ45
connector
Port for RS485 input 0
MON1
RJ45
connector
+24 V or
-48 V
3V3 or
7W2
connector
Introducing +24 V or -48 V DC power
EXTALM0
RJ45
connector
EXTALM1
RJ45
connector
MON0
RJ45
connector
MON1
RJ45
connector
Slot 18
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

132
DBS3900
3.1.13 UEIU
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU) of the BBU3900 transmits monitoring signals
and alarm signals from external devices to the main control board.
Panel
Figure 3-36 shows the panel of the UEIU.
Figure 3-36 Panel of the UEIU
Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions:
l
Provides two ports with each receiving one path of RS485 signal.
Provides two ports with each receiving four paths of Boolean signals. The Boolean signals
can only be dry contact or OC signals.
Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
board.
Port
The UEIU is configured in slot 18 and provides two RS485 signal ports, each transmitting one
path of RS485 signals, and two Boolean signal ports, each transmitting four paths of Boolean
signals.
Table 3-66 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.
Table 3-66 Ports on the panel of the UEIU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Slot
Silkscre
en
Connect
or
Quanti
ty
Description
Slot 18
EXTALM0
RJ45
connector
EXTALM1
RJ45
connector

133
DBS3900
Slot
Silkscre
en
Connect
or
Quanti
ty
Description
MON0
RJ45
connector
MON1
RJ45
connector
3.1.14 UTRP
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP) is an extended transmission board in the
BBU3900 and provides ports connecting to transmission equipment.
Specifications
Table 3-67 describes the specifications of the UTRP.
Table 3-67 Specifications of the UTRP
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Board
Subboard/
Board
Type
Supporte
d Mode
Transmis
sion
Mode
Number
of ports
Port
Capacity
Full/
HalfDuplex
UTRP2
UEOC
UMTS
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
optical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000 Mbit/
s
Fullduplex
UTRP3
UAEC
UMTS
ATM over
E1/T1
Eight
channels
Fullduplex
UTRP4
UIEC
UMTS
IP over E1/
T1
Eight
channels
Fullduplex
UTRPb4
Without a
sub-board
GSM
TDM over
E1/T1
Eight
channels
Fullduplex
UTRP6
UUAS
UMTS
STM-1/
OC-3
One
channel
Fullduplex
UTRP9
UQEC
UMTS
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000 Mbit/
s
Fullduplex

134
DBS3900
Board
Subboard/
Board
Type
Supporte
d Mode
Transmis
sion
Mode
Number
of ports
Port
Capacity
Full/
HalfDuplex
UTRPc
Without a
sub-board
GSM
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
electrical
ports
10 Mbit/s,
100 Mbit/
s, and
1000 Mbit/
s
Fullduplex
Transmiss
ion over
FE/GE
optical
ports
100 Mbit/s
and 1000
Mbit/s
Fullduplex
UMTS
LTE
Panel
Figure 3-37 shows the panel of the UTRP2.
Figure 3-37 Panel of the UTRP2 (with two optical ports)
Figure 3-38 shows the panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4.

Figure 3-38 Panel of the UTRP3 and UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Figure 3-39 shows the panel of the UTRPb4 in GSM mode.

Figure 3-39 Panel of the UTRP4 (with eight E1/T1 channels)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

135
DBS3900

Figure 3-40 Panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)

Figure 3-41 Panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
Figure 3-42 shows the panel of the UTRPc.

Figure 3-42 Panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
Functions
The UTRP performs the following functions:
l
Provides extended E1/T1 ports to connect to transmission equipment, supporting ATM,

TDM, and IP transmission.
Provides electrical and optical transmission ports to connect to transmission equipment.
Supports cold backup.
Restriction
The GTMUa cannot be used together with the UTRPc.
Indicators
Table 3-68 describes the indicators on the UTRP panel.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

136
DBS3900
Table 3-68 Indicators on the UTRP panel

Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
is faulty.

1s

properly.

for 0.125s
l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off

properly.

1s
An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
The board serves as

an active board.
Steady off
l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
The ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode has different status from the ACT indicator
on other boards, as listed in Table 3-69.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

137
DBS3900
Table 3-69 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRP board in GSM mode
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
ACT
Green
Steady on
l Before the
configuration
takes effect, none
or both of the two
E1 ports in GSM
mode are
functional.
l The
configuration has
taken effect.

for 0.125s
Before the
configuration takes
effect, only one E1
port in GSM mode is
functional.
Each Ethernet port on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc corresponds to two indicators indicating
the status of the current link, as listed in Table 3-70.
Table 3-70 Status of the indicators for Ethernet ports on the UTRP2, UTRP9, and UTRPc
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
LINK
Green
Steady on
The link is connected

properly.
Steady off
The link is not

connected properly.
Blinking
Data is being
transmitted or
received on the link.
Steady off
No data is being
transmitted or
received on the link.
ACT
Orange
There are three indicators on the UTRPc: R0, R1, and R2, of which the status is listed in Table
3-71.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

138
DBS3900
Table 3-71 Status of indicators on the UTRPc

Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
R0
Red or green
Steady off
The board is not

working in GSM
mode.
Steady green
The board is working

in GSM mode.
Steady red
Reserved
Steady off
The board is not

working in UMTS
mode.
Steady green

in UMTS mode.
Steady red
Reserved
Steady off
The board is not

working in LTE
mode.
Steady green

in LTE mode.
Steady red
Reserved
R1
Red or green
R2
Red or green
NOTE
If multiple indicators are on at the same time, the board works in multiple modes.
Ports
Table 3-72 describes the ports on the UTRP2.
Table 3-72 Ports on the panel of the UTRP2 (with 2 optical ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
FE/GE optical port
SFP female
connector
The UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 have the same ports, as listed in Table 3-73.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

139
DBS3900
Table 3-73 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 (with 8 E1/T1 ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
E1/T1
E1/T1 port
DB26 female
connector
Table 3-74 lists the ports on the UTRP6.

Table 3-74 Ports on the panel of the UTRP6 (with one STM-1 channel)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
STM-1/OC-3
STM-1/OC-3
SFP female
connector
Table 3-75 lists the ports on the UTRP9.

Table 3-75 Ports on the panel of the UTRP9 (with four electrical ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 to FE/GE3
RJ45 connector
Table 3-76 describes the ports on the panel of the UTRPc.

Table 3-76 Ports on the panel of the UTRPc (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)
Silkscreen
Port Type
Quantity
Connector
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
FE/GE optical port
SFP female
connector
FE/GE2 to FE/GE5
RJ45 connector
DIP Switch
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
There are three DIP switches on the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4. SW1 and SW2 are used to
set whether to ground the receiver end of the E1 cable, and SW3 is used to set the resistance of
the E1 cable. Figure 3-43 shows the DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4. Figure 3-44
shows the DIP switches on the UTRPb4.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

140
DBS3900
Figure 3-43 DIP switches on the UTRP3 and UTRP4
Figure 3-44 DIP switches on the UTRPb4
Table 3-77, Table 3-78, and Table 3-79 list the settings of the DIP switches on the UTRP.
Table 3-77 Settings of SW1 on the UTRP
DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
SW1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Imbalanced
Others
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

Unavailable
141
DBS3900

DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
SW2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Balanced
ON
ON
ON
ON
Imbalanced
Others
Unavailable
CAUTION
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to No.4 to No.7 E1 channels. SW2
corresponds to No.0 to No.3 E1 channels.

DIP
Switch
DIP Setting
Description
SW3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
T1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
The E1
resistance is
set to 120
ohm.
ON
ON
ON
ON
The E1
resistance is
set to 75 ohm.
Others
Unavailable
3.1.15 USCU
This section describes the universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU).
Specifications
The USCU falls into five types, as shown in Table 3-80.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

142
DBS3900
Table 3-80 Specifications of the USCU

Board
Supported Mode
Supported Satellite Card
USCUb11
LTE
N/A
USCUb14
GSM
UBLOX single-satellite card
UMTS
LTE
USCUb22
GSM
Naviors dual-satellite card
UMTS
LTE
Panel
There are five types of USCU: USCUb11, USCUb12, USCUb14, USCUb22, and USCUb21,
as shown in Figure 3-45 and Figure 3-46. The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have the
same exterior. The USCUb22 and the USCUb21 have the same exterior.
Figure 3-45 USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 panel
Figure 3-46 USCUb22 and USCUb21 panel
(1) GPS port
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
(2) RGPS port
(3) TOD port
(4) M-1PPS port

(5) BITS port
143
DBS3900

NOTE
l The USCUb11, USCUb12, and USCUb14 have silkscreens USCUb11 , USCUb12 and USCUb14
indicating their board types on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
l The USCUb22 and USCUb21 have silkscreens USCUb22 and USCUb21 indicating their board types
on the lower left corner of the board panel, respectively.
Functions
The USCU has the following functions:
l
The USCUb11 provides ports to communicate with the RGPS (for example the reused
equipment of the customer) and BITS equipment. It does not support GPS signals.
The USCUb12 contains an RT satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.
The USCUb14 contains a UBLOX satelliate card, which does not support RGPS signals.
The USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.
The USCUb21 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a K161 satellite card, which must
be purchased locally and installed onsite.
Indicators
Table 3-81 and Table 3-82 describe the indicators on the USCU.
Table 3-81 Indicators on the USCU
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on
There is power
is faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
is faulty.

1s
The board is

for 0.125s
l The board is
being loaded or
configured.
l The board is not
started.
ALM
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Red
Steady on
An alarm is
generated, and the
board needs to be
replaced.
Steady off

properly.

144
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
ACT
Green
Status
Description

1s
An alarm is
generated and you
need to locate the
whether to replace
the board.
Steady on
The board serves as

an active board.
Steady off
l The board does

not serve as an
active board.
l The board has not
been activated.
l The board is not
providing any
services.
Table 3-82 Indicators for the TOD ports

Color
Status
Description
Green (on the left)
The green indicator is steady

on and the orange indicator is
steady off.
The TOD port is configured as

an input port.
Orange (on the right)
The orange indicator is steady

on and the green indicator is
steady off.
The TOD port is configured as

an output port.
Ports
Table 3-83 describes the ports on the USCU.
Table 3-83 Ports on the USCU
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
GPS
SMA connector
The GPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21,

USCUb14 and USCUb22 receive GPS signals.
The GPS port on the USCUb11 is reserved and
cannot receive GPS signals.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

145
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
RGPS port
PCB welded
wiring terminal
The RGPS port on the USCUb11 receives RGPS

signals.
The RGPS ports on the USCUb12, USCUb21,
USCUb14 and USCUb22 are reserved and cannot
receive RGPS signals.
TOD0 port
RJ45 connector
This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals.
TOD1 port
RJ45 connector
This port receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals,

and receives TOD signals from the M1000.
BITS port
SMA connector
This port receives BITS clock signals, supports

adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock
reference source.
M-1PPS port
SMA connector
This port receives 1PPS signals from the M1000.
3.1.16 UBRI
The universal baseband radio interface board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or
electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the
CPRI.
Panel
Figure 3-47 shows the panel of the UBRI.
Figure 3-47 UBRI panel
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:
l
Provides extended CPRI electrical or optical ports.
Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Indicators
Table 3-84 describes the indicators on the UBRI panel.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

146
DBS3900
Table 3-84 Indicators on the UBRI panel

Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on

board is faulty.
Steady off

board is faulty.

0.125s
Software is being loaded to the

board.
Steady on
An alarm is generated on the

board.
Steady off

board.
Steady on

board.
Steady off

an active board.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green

activated.
any services.
The UBRI provides six indicators indicating the status of the CRRI links. The indicators are
above the SFP ports. Table 3-85 describes the indicators.
Table 3-85 CPRI port status indicators
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
CPRIx
Red or green
Steady green
The CPRI link is


147
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
Steady red
An optical module
fails to receive signals
because of the
following reasons:
l The optical
module is faulty.
l The fiber optic
cable is broken.

1s and off for 1s)

following reasons:
sources.
l The data rates of
the CPRI ports do
not match each
other.
Steady off
l The optical
module cannot be
detected.
l The CPRI cable is
not connected.
Ports
Table 3-86 describes the ports on the UBRI panel.
Table 3-86 Ports on the UBRI panel
Silkscreen
Connector
Quantity
Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5
SFP female
connector
Connecting the BBU

and the RF module
The following table lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

148
DBS3900
Table 3-87 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the UBRI

Board
CPRI Port
Quantity
CPRI Port Data

Rate (Gbit/s)
Topology Type
UBRI
1.25/2.5
Star, chain, and ring

topologies
3.1.17 UCIU
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) interconnects BBUs. It forwards
control and synchronization information from one BBU to another.
Panel
Figure 3-48 shows the UCIU panel.
Figure 3-48 UCIU panel
Functions
The UCIU performs the following functions:
l
Supports single- or multi-mode configuration and management. When in multi-mode, it is

shared by multiple modes and can be configured and managed by any mode.
Interconnects BBUs and forwards control and synchronization information from one BBU
to another.
Supports co-site of a 3900 series base station and a 3012 series base station.
Supports the connection to a UMPT using a fiber optic cable.
Indicators
A UCIU provides one DB15 port, three running indicators, and six SFP+ ports for
interconnection, with one double-colored indicator on each port. Table 3-88 describes the
indicators on the UCIU panel.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

149
DBS3900
Table 3-88 Indicators on the UCIU panel

Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Steady on

board is faulty.
Steady off

board is faulty.

1s

for 0.125s
l The board is being loaded or

configured.
ALM
ACT
Red
Green
Steady on

Steady off
There is no fault.

1s

board.
Steady on

board.
Steady off

an active board.
activated.
any services.
M0 to M4
and S0
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Red or green
Steady green
The inter-BBU transmission

link is normal.
Steady red
The optical module fails to

transmit or receive signals, or
the fiber optic cable is faulty.

150
DBS3900
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description

0.125s and off for
0.125s)
Cables are connected in an

incorrect manner. For example:
l In the UCIU+UMPT
scenario, the S0 port on the
UCIU is connected to the CI
port on the UMPT.
Indicators for the S0 and CI
ports are blinking.
l The ports are connected in
ring topology. Indicators for
all incorrectly connected
ports are blinking.
Steady off
The optical module cannot be

detected.
Ports
Table 3-89 describes UCIU ports.
Table 3-89 UCIU ports
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
M0 to M4
SFP female
connector
Primary inter-BBU ports, which connect to the

secondary inter-BBU ports.
S0
SFP female
connector
Secondary inter-BBU port, which connects to the

primary inter-BBU port.
GCK
DB15 connector
Provides reference clocks when the base station

and a 3012 series base station are combined.
3.2 RRU
The Radio Remote Unit (RRU) converts and forwards signals between the BBU and the antenna
system.
The RRU implements the following functions:
l
Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data for the
communication between the BBU and the RRU.
The RX channel receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the received
signals to IF signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital (A/D)
conversion. The TX channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog (D/A)
conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

151
DBS3900
Multiplexes RX and TX signals, which enables these signals to share the same antenna
path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
For details about various types of RRUs, see the hardware description of the corresponding RRU.
3.3 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,
UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
3.3.1 SLPU
The SLPU, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high.
Figure 3-49 shows the SLPU.
Figure 3-49 SLPU
3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU

This section describes the slot assignment rules for the SPLU boards.
Slots of the SLPU

Figure 3-50 shows the slots of the SLPU.
Figure 3-50 SLPU slots
Slot Assignment Rules for the SLPU

When the SLPU is used as a trunk signal protection unit, a mandatory component, it can be
integrated with UELP or UFLP and is installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet.
Table 3-90 lists the slot assignment rules of the SLPU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

152
DBS3900
Table 3-90 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU

Board
Optional or
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Slot
Remarks
UELP
Optional
Slot 0 to slot 3
The UELP is
installed, in
descending
order of priority,
in slot 2, 0, 1, or
3.
UFLP
Optional
Slot 3
If both the
UELP and
UFLP are
configured, the
UFLP is
installed in a slot
with a higher
priority than the
UELP.
When there are not more than 16 dry contacts in the SLPU, the SLPU is used as a monitoring
signal protection unit, which is an optional component. In this case, the SLPU is integrated with
two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U (44.45 mm or 1.75 in.) space at the bottom of the BBU.
Table 3-91 lists the slot assignment rules for the SLPU.
Table 3-91 Slot assignment rules for the SLPU
Board
Optional or
Mandatory
Quantity
Slot
Remarks
USLP2
Optional
Slot 2 and slot 3
3.3.3 UELP
Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths
of E1/T1 signals.
Panel
Figure 3-51 shows the panel of the UELP.
Figure 3-51 UELP panel
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

153
DBS3900
Ports
Table 3-92 lists the ports on the UELP.
Table 3-92 Ports on the UELP
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE
Connecting to a transmission
board of the base station
OUTSIDE
Connecting to an external
transmission device
DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.
The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 3-52 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.
Figure 3-52 DIP switch on the UELP
Table 3-93 describes the DIP switch on the UELP.

Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

154
DBS3900
Table 3-93 DIP switch on the UELP

DIP
Switch
DIP Status
Description
S1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other status
Not grounded
Grounded
NOTE
The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable
of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.
3.3.4 UFLP
Each universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE
signals. Each universal FE lightning protection unit type B (UFLPB) provides protection for two
channels of FE/GE signals.
NOTE
The UFLPB applies only to the LTE mode.
Panel
Figure 3-53 shows the UELP panel.
Figure 3-53 UELP panel
Figure 3-54 shows the UFLPB panel.

Figure 3-54 UFLPB panel
Port
Table 3-94 describes UFLP ports.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

155
DBS3900
Table 3-94 UFLP ports

Port Location
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to a
transmission board of the
base station
OUTSIDE side
FE0 and FE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to an external
transmission device
Table 3-95 describes UFLPB ports.

Table 3-95 UFLPB ports
Port Location
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Connector
Description
INSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to a
transmission board
of the base station
OUTSIDE side
FE/GE0 and FE/GE1
RJ45 connector
Connecting to an
external
transmission device
3.3.5 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection
unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel
Figure 3-55 shows the panel of a USLP2.
Figure 3-55 Panel of a USLP2
Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 3-96 lists the ports on the
panel of the USLP2.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

156
DBS3900
Table 3-96 Ports on the panel of the USLP2

Silkscreen on
the Panel
Port Type
Quantity
Description
IN0, IN1, IN2,

and IN3
4-pin
Input ports, which

connect to customized
alarm devices
OUT0 and OUT1
RJ45 connector
Output ports, which

connect to an EXTALM port of the UPEU
or UEIU in the cabinet
Figure 3-56 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on
the USLP2.
Figure 3-56 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
OUT1
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2
IN0
1
IN1
4
IN2
4
IN3
4
Table 3-97 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the
USLP2.
Table 3-97 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
Input
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Pin
Silkscreen on the
Panel
Pin
INO
IN0.1
OUT1
OUT1.1
IN1
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Output
IN0.2
OUT1.2
IN0.3
OUT1.4
IN0.4
OUT1.5
IN1.1
OUT1.3
IN1.2
OUT1.6

157
DBS3900
Input
Output
Silkscreen on the
Panel
IN2
Pin
Pin
IN1.3
OUT1.7
IN1.4
OUT1.8
IN2.1
IN3
Silkscreen on the
Panel
OUT0
OUT0.1
IN2.2
OUT0.2
IN2.3
OUT0.4
IN2.4
OUT0.5
IN3.1
OUT0.3
IN3.2
OUT0.6
IN3.3
OUT0.7
IN3.4
OUT0.8
For details about the application of the USLP2, see 3.3.2 Slot Assignment Rules for the
SLPU.
3.4 WGRU
The WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information
and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock
signals together with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS
positioning information. The WGRU is optional and is installed in a dedicated case. Each base
station can be configured with a WGRU.
Exterior
Figure 3-57 shows a WGRU. Figure 3-58 shows a WGRU installed in a case.
Figure 3-57 WGRU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

158
DBS3900
Figure 3-58 WGRU installed in a case
Panel
As shown in Figure 3-59, there are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the
WGRU.
As shown in Figure 3-60, there is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear
panel of the WGRU.
Figure 3-59 Front panel of a WGRU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

159
DBS3900
Figure 3-60 Rear panel of a WGRU
Indicators on the Front Panel

On the front panel of the WGRU, there are three indicators: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table
3-98 describes the three indicators.
Table 3-98 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU
Silkscreen
Color
Status
Description
RUN
Green

1s
The WGRU is
running properly.
Steady on
There is power
supply, but the
WGRU suite is
faulty.
Steady off
There is no power
supply, or the
WGRU suite is
faulty.
Steady off
No alarm is
generated.
Steady on
An alarm is reported,
indicating a fault
during the operation.
Steady on
The WGRU has

interpreted the
positioning
information.
Steady off
The WGRU fails to

interpret the
positioning
information.
ALM
ACT
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Red
Green

160
DBS3900
Ports on the Front Panel

On the front panel of the WGRU, there are six ports: PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and
CLK2. Table 3-99 describes the six ports.
Table 3-99 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU
Silkscreen
Port Type
Description
PPS1
RJ45 connector
Outputs PPS signals.
PPS2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
COM1
RJ45 connector
Forwards GPS information

and BBU interaction,
management, and
maintenance information.
COM2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
CLK1
RJ45 connector
Reserved
CLK2
RJ45 connector
Reserved
Ports on the Rear Panel

On the rear panel of the WGRU, there are two ports: POWER and ANT.
Table 3-100 describes the two ports.
Table 3-100 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
POWER
Two-pole male connector
Feeds external power.
ANT
N-type female connector
Connects to the GPS antenna

system.
3.5 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet
and reports related alarms.
The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the
environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following
items:
l
Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke
Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

161
DBS3900
Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

162
DBS3900
DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the exteriors, structures, specifications, and application scenarios of
various DBS3900 cabinets and racks as well as the requirements for equipment in the DBS3900
cabinets.
For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the TP48600A
cabinet, see TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual. For details about the exterior, functions,
specifications, and components of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T cabinets, see IBBS700D &
IBBS700T User Guide.
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900
To adapt to the complicated and various environments indoors and outdoors, Huawei provides
multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the
APM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB/OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, and
IFS06. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMB
is short for outdoor mini box, IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support.
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
This section describes the module or board configurations of cabinets used by the DBS3900.
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by the DBS3900
This section describes the engineering specifications of various cabinets used by the DBS3900.
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets
This section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment
The equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering
specifications.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

163
DBS3900
4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks Used by the DBS3900

To adapt to the complicated and various environments indoors and outdoors, Huawei provides
multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the
APM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB/OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, and
IFS06. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMB
is short for outdoor mini box, IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support.
APM/TMC Series Cabinets

Figure 4-1 shows the APM/TMC series cabinets: APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H
(Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),
TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D). APM30H is short for advanced power module with
a heat exchanger, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat exchanger.
Figure 4-1 Exteriors of the APM/TMC series cabinets
Battery Cabinets
The battery cabinets include the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D),
IBBS700D, and IBBS700T. Figure 4-2 shows the IBBS700D and IBBS700T, and Figure 4-3
shows other types of battery cabinets.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

164
DBS3900
Figure 4-2 IBBS700D and IBBS700T
Figure 4-3 Other types of battery cabinets
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

165
DBS3900
OMB/OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 4-4 shows the OMB and OMB (Ver.C).
Figure 4-4 Exteriors of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)
IMB03/IFS06
Figure 4-5 shows the IMB03 and IFS06.
Figure 4-5 Exteriors of the IMB03 and IFS06
4.2 Configurations of Cabinets Used by the DBS3900

This section describes the module or board configurations of cabinets used by the DBS3900.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

166
DBS3900
Functions
NOTE
For the functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T
(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product
Description, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.
The main functions of cabinets used by the DBS3900 are as follows:

l
The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used
for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power
distribution functions for distributed or separate base stations used outdoors and also
provide space for customer equipment.
The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation
and monitoring modes. The APM30 uses breathable film and fans to dissipate heat, and
the APM30H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and outer air circulation
fans to dissipate heat. The APM30 is configured with an APM power monitoring
interface unit (APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment
and power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with a heat exchange
unit type A (HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.
The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a central
monitoring unit type A (CMUA) to perform centralized monitoring. The APM30H
(Ver.A) uses a power distribution unit (PDU) to distribute power, and the APM30H
(Ver.B) uses an embedded power system (EPS) to distribute power. In addition, the
APM30H (Ver.B) uses an electronic label unit (ELU) to report the cabinet type.
The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) uses a central
monitoring unit type E (CMUE) in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report
alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA to perform centralized monitoring.
The APM30H (Ver.C) uses an embedded power subrack unit (EPU), EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05, to distribute power, and the APM30H (Ver.B) uses an EPS to distribute
power.
The differences between the APM30H(Ver.D) and APM30H (Ver.C) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the APM30H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE
in the fan assembly to monitor the fans and report alarms. The EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05 installed in the APM30H(Ver.D) has higher power distribution capacity
than the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).
The transmission cabinets (TMCs) are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The
TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed or separate
base stations and also provide space for customer equipment.
The differences between the TMC and TMC11H (Ver.A) reside in the heat dissipation
and monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and TMC11H
(Ver.B) reside in the monitoring mode. The TMC uses breathable film and fans to
dissipate heat, and the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses a heat exchanger as well as inner and
outer air circulation fans to dissipate heat. The TMC uses an APMI and an AFMU to
monitor other components, the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses an HEUA to monitor other
components, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA and a HERT power monitoring
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

167
DBS3900
interface unit (HPMI) to monitor other components. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver.B)
uses an ELU to report the cabinet type.
The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.B) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a CMUA
to perform centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B to
distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) uses a DCDU-03B to distribute power.
The differences between the TMC11H(Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.C) reside in the
monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a CMUEA in the
fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a CMUE
in the fan assembly to monitor fans and report alarms. The TMC11H(Ver.D) uses a
DCDU-12B to distribute power, and the TMC11H (Ver.C) uses a DCDU-11B to
distribute power.
l
Battery cabinets are used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. The cabinets provide
space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for distributed or
separate base stations. The IBBS200D and IBBS200T differ in the heat dissipation mode.
The outdoor mini box (OMB) and OMB (Ver.C) apply to outdoor distributed base stations.
Their differences reside in the monitoring and power distribution modes. The OMB uses
an AC/DC power system or DCDU-03B to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, and the
OMB (Ver.C) uses an ETP48100-A1 or PDU10D-01 to supply power to the BBU and
RRUs. The OMB uses an HEUA to monitor fans and report alarms, and the OMB (Ver.C)
uses an HEUB to monitor fans and report alarms.
The indoor mini box 03 (IMB03) applies to indoor distributed base stations. It uses a BBU
and other customer equipment, and supports either AC or DC power input. The indoor floor
installation support 06 (IFS06) applies to indoor distributed base stations, and supports
centralized installation of RRUs.
The TP48600A is an outdoor power cabinet. It provides AC and DC power distribution

functions for distributed base stations outdoors and also provides space for customer
equipment. The TP48600A uses storage batteries which provide backup power for
distributed base stations.
APM
The APM series cabinets are classified into APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B),
APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H(Ver.D). Figure 4-6 shows the configurations of the APM
series cabinets.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

168
DBS3900
Figure 4-6 Configurations of the APM series cabinets
Different types of the APM series cabinets use different heat dissipation, power distribution, and
monitoring modes, which are supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
APM30
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
APMI,
AFMU, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
PDU
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.

169
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.A)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HEUA,
HPMI, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
PDU
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.

170
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.B)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
PDU,
processing
baseband
signals.
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUA, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

171
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, a
signal
lightning
protection
unit (SLPU)
configured
with a
universal E1/
T1 lighting
protection
unit (UELP)
or/and a
universal FE/
GE lightning
protection
(UFLP) is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

172
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.C)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
EPS
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.B).
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPS,
processing
baseband
signals.
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUE, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

173
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
EPU
(EPU03A-0
3 or
EPU03A-05
)
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power. It is
configured
only in the
APM30H
(Ver.C).
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.

174
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
APM30H
(Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
A fan
assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.

175
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
EPU
(EPU05A-0
3 or
EPU05A-05
)
Mandatory
The PDU
distributes
AC power
and DC
power.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
EPU,
processing
baseband
signals.

176
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
PSU (AC/
DC)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC. It is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
The PMU is
configured
only in an
AC cabinet.
TMC
The TMC series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B),
TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H(Ver.D). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following types based on
different application scenarios:
l
Figure 4-7 shows TMC cabinets which provide space for the transmission equipment.
Figure 4-7 TMC series cabinets (1)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

177
DBS3900
Figure 4-8 shows the TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario.
Figure 4-8 TMC series cabinets (2)
Different types of TMC cabinets use different heat dissipation and monitoring modes, which are
supported by various components, as listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
APMI,
AFMU, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

178
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The TMC
is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The TMC
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
BBU
Mandatory

The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.
179
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HEUA,
HPMI, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the TMC
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.A)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

180
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUA, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.

181
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

182
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.B) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3C when
the
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.B)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-0
3B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
BBU
Mandatory

The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-03B,
processing
baseband
signals.
183
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
configured
with the
HPMI,
CMUE, and
fans is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet.
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

184
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-11
Mandatory
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.C) is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1C when
the
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
provides
space
only for
the
transmiss
ion
equipme
nt.
l The
TMC11H
(Ver.C)
with a
built-in
BBU is
configure
d with a
DCDU-1
1B when
the -48 V
DC
power is
supplied.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
BBU
Mandatory

The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-11B,
processing
baseband
signals.
185
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serving as a
transmission
cabinet
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
A fan
assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.
SLPU
Optional
When the
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
houses BBU
1 (leaf BBU),
an SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
installed in
the top 1 U
space of the
TMC11H
(Ver.D).
DCDU-12C
Mandatory
The
TMC11H
(Ver.D) is
configured
with a
DCDU-12C
when the
TMC
provides
space only
for the
transmission
equipment or
is configured
with BBU 1
(leaf BBU).

186
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serving as a
power
cabinet
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Optional
In triplemode
scenarios,
BBU 1 (leaf
BBU) can be
installed in
the TMC11H
(Ver.D).
Fan
assembly
Mandatory
A fan
assembly is
installed at
the top of the
cabinet. It is
configured
with fans and
the CMUEA.
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with a UELP
or/and a
UFLP is
mandatorily
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
To protect
monitoring
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with two
USLP2s can
be optionally
installed in
the 1 U space
below the
BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

187
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
DCDU-12B
Mandatory
When the
TMC11H
(Ver.D)
serves as a
power
cabinet, it is
configured
with a
DCDU-12B.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the 2 U space
below the
DCDU-12B,
processing
baseband
signals.
BBC/IBBS
The battery cabinets are classified into BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-9 shows the configurations of
the BBC or IBBS series cabinets.
Figure 4-9 Components in the BBC/IBBS series cabinets
The differences between the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T reside in the monitoring and heat
dissipation module configurations, as listed in Table 4-3.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

188
DBS3900
Table 4-3 Functions of the components in the IBBS series cabinets
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBC
Power
supply box
for the
heating film
Mandatory
The power
supply box
feeds power
into the
heating film.
Ground bar
for the
cabinet
Mandatory
The ground
bar is used
for the
grounding of
the
components
in the
cabinet.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
BBC
Mandatory
The BBC
provides
power to
storage
batteries.

189
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
IBBS200T
(Ver.A)
TEC
Mandatory
The
thermoelectr
ic cooling
unit (TEC) is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
fan, heatdissipation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
Transfer
terminal for
the signal
cable
Mandatory
The transfer
terminal
block for the
signal cable
is installed
on the inner
side of the
front door of
the cabinet. It
consists of
four
interconnecti
on terminals.

190
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
IBBS200D
(Ver.B)/
(Ver.C)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Transfer
terminal for
the input
power cable
for the TEC
Mandatory
The transfer
terminal for
the input
power cable
for the TEC
is installed
on the inner
side of the
front door of
the cabinet.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
Junction box
for the power
cable
Mandatory
The junction
box for the
power cable
is installed
on the inner
right side of
the
IBBS200T.
It consists of
the copper
bar, circuit
breaker for
the batteries,
and circuit
breaker for
the TEC.
Fan
Mandatory
The fan is
installed on
the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat from the
cabinet.

191
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
CMUA/
CMUE
Mandatory
A CMUA or
CMUE
provides the
following
functions:
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
Power
distribution
box
Optional
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.

192
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
IBBS200T
(Ver.B)/
(Ver.C)
TEC
Mandatory
The TEC is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
CMUA/
CMUE
Mandatory
A CMUA or
CMUE
provides the
following
functions:
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

193
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
IBBS200D
(Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
Fan
Mandatory
The fan is
installed on
the front
door of the
cabinet,
dissipating
heat from the
cabinet.

194
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
CMUEA
Mandatory
The
CMUEA
provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.

195
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
TEC
Mandatory
The TEC is
installed in
the
protecting
hood for the
TEC on the
front door of
the cabinet.
The TEC
consists of
the TEC
module,
inner air
circulation
fan, outer air
circulation
piece, and
monitoring
board.
CMUEA
Mandatory
The
CMUEA
provides
functions of
temperature
control,
Boolean
alarm
detection,
and ELU
identificatio
n of the
cabinet.

196
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed on
the upper
inner right
side of the
cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
The following figure shows the interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

197
DBS3900
Figure 4-10 Interiors of the IBBS700D and IBBS700T
The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T.
Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS700D and IBBS700T
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
IBBS700D
Fan
mounting
frame
Mandatory
The fan
mounting
frame is
installed in
the lower
middle in the
front door of
the cabinet,
and
configured
with a fan.

198
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
CMUEA
Mandatory
The central
monitoring
unit type EA
(CMUEA)
controls
temperature,
detects
Boolean
alarm, and
identifies the
ELU.
3 and 4
ELU
Mandatory
The
electronic
label unit
(ELU)
reports the
cabinet type
automaticall
y to facilitate
troubleshoot
ing.
When a CCU
is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 4.
When no
CCU is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 3.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

199
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
CCU
The cabinet
control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and manages
devices.
When an
APM30H
(Ver.D) is
configured,
no CCU is
installed.
When a
TP48600AH17B1 is
configured,
the CCU
must be
installed.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
AC Junction
box
Mandatory

The AC
junction box
is installed
on the inner
left wall of
the cabinet. It
provides
power for the
heater.
200
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
HAU01A-01
Optional
The Heater
Assembly
Unit 01A-01
(HAU01A-0
1) ensures a
suitable
storage and
operating
temperature
for the
storage
batteries.
Storage
battery
Mandatory
16
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
Door status
sensor
Mandatory
The door
status sensor
monitors the
status (open
or closed) of
the front
door of the
cabinet.
10
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed in
the middle of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

201
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
IBBS700T
Inner air
circulation
fan
Mandatory
The inner air

circulation
fan is
installed at
the top of the
front door of
the cabinet. It
dissipates
heat from the
storage
batteries.
TEC
Mandatory
To dissipate
heat from the
storage
batteries, the
TEC ensures
the normal
operation of
the cabinet in
hightemperature
areas.
Outer air
circulation
fan
Mandatory
The outer air

circulation
fan is
installed at
the bottom of
the front
door of the
cabinet. It
dissipates
heat from the
TEC.

202
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
CMUF
Mandatory
The central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF)
controls
temperature,
detects
Boolean
alarm, and
identifies the
ELU.
5 and 6
ELU
Mandatory
The
electronic
label unit
(ELU)
reports the
cabinet type
automaticall
y to facilitate
troubleshoot
ing.
When a CCU
is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 6.
When no
CCU is
configured,
the ELU is
installed in
position 5.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

203
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
CCU
The cabinet
control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and manages
devices.
When an
APM30H
(Ver.D) is
configured,
no CCU is
installed.
When a
TP48600AH17B1 is
configured,
the CCU
must be
installed.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
AC Junction
box
Mandatory

The AC
junction box
is installed
on the inner
left wall of
the cabinet. It
provides
power for the
heater.
204
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Componen
t
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Remarks
HAU01A-01
Optional
The Heater
Assembly
Unit 01A-01
(HAU01A-0
1) ensures a
suitable
storage and
operating
temperature
for the
storage
batteries.
10
Storage
battery
Mandatory
16
The storage
batteries
provide
longduration
backup
power for
base stations.
11
Door status
sensor
Mandatory
The door
status sensor
monitors the
status (open
or closed) of
the front
door of the
cabinet.
12
Power
distribution
box
Mandatory
The power
distribution
box is
installed in
the middle of
the cabinet. It
transfers and
distributes
power to the
TEC or FAN
unit and
storage
batteries.

205
DBS3900
OMB/OMB (Ver.C)
Figure 4-11 shows the configurations of OMBs, including the AC and DC OMBs.
Figure 4-11 Configuration of the OMBs
The AC OMB and DC OMB have different power equipment and use different surge protection
methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Components in the OMBs
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
Description
HEUA
Mandatory
The HEUA
provides power
for the fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information and
power surge
protection alarm
information,
and reports the
collected
information to
the BBU.

206
DBS3900
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
Description
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in the 2
U space on the
left side of the
cabinet,
processing
baseband
signals.
AC surge
protection box
Mandatory
The AC surge
protection box
provides surge
protection for
the AC input
power.
AC/DC power
equipment
Mandatory
The AC/DC
power
equipment
converts 220 V
AC power to -48
V DC power.
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
The
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to all
components in
the cabinet.
Figure 4-12 shows the configuration of OMBs (Ver.C), including the AC OMB (Ver.C) and
DC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

207
DBS3900
Figure 4-12 Configuration of the OMBs (Ver.C)
The AC OMB (Ver.C) and DC OMB (Ver.C) have different power equipment and use different
surge protection methods, which are implemented by different modules, as listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6 Components in the OMBs (Ver.C)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
Description
ELU
Mandatory
The ELU
automatically
reports the
cabinet type.
PMU 11A
Mandatory
The PMU 11A

provides power
system, power
monitoring
function, and
alarm reporting
function.

208
DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
Description
HEUB
Mandatory
The HEUB
provides power
for the fan
assembly,
monitors the
status of the fan
assembly,
collects the
cabinet
environment
monitoring
information and
power surge
protection alarm
information,
and reports the
collected
information to
the BBU.
PSU
(R4850G2)
Mandatory
The PSU
converts 110 V/
220 V AC
power into -48
V DC.
BBU3900
Mandatory
The BBU3900
processes
baseband
signals and
enables
interaction
between the
base station and
base station
controller.

209
DBS3900
No.
Module/
Board
Optional/
Mandatory
Maximum
Quantity
Configured in
a Single
Cabinet
Description
Fan assembly
Mandatory
The fan
assembly
dissipates heat
from the
cabinet. Two
fan assemblies
are separately
installed at the
left bottom and
the left top of the
OMB.
PDU10D-01
Mandatory
The
PDU10D-01 is a
DC power
distribution unit
supplying -48 V
DC power to all
components in
the cabinet.
SPD
Mandatory
The SPD
provides surge
protection for
the AC input
power.
ETP48100-A1
Mandatory
The embedded
telecommunication power A1
(ETP48100-A1)
converts
external AC
input power into
DC power.
IMB03
The IMB03 is classified into the AC and DC IMB03, of which the configurations are shown in
Figure 4-13.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

210
DBS3900
Figure 4-13 IMB03 cabinets
The AC IMB03 and DC IMB03 have different power equipment. Table 4-7 lists the components
configured in each IMB03 cabinet.
Table 4-7 Components in the IMB03 cabinet
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
AC IMB03
AC/DC
power
equipment
Mandatory
The AC/DC
power
equipment
converts 220
V AC power
to -48 V DC
power.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the right 2 U
space of the
cabinet.
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
The
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to all
components
in the
cabinet.
DC IMB03
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

211
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is
installed in
the right 2 U
space of the
cabinet.
TP48600A
The TP48600A supports AC power input. Figure 4-14 shows the interior of the TP48600A.
Figure 4-14 Configurations of the TP48600A
Table 4-8 lists the components in the TP48600A.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

212
DBS3900
Table 4-8 Components in the TP48600A

Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
TP48600A
FAU02D-07
Mandatory
The
FAU02D-07
is a fan
assembly
unit used for
the
equipment
compartmen
t. It consists
of two fans
and a central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF).
The fans
dissipate
heat from the
cabinet.
The
FAU02D-07
is shortened
to FAU in
this
document.
2
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
CCU
Mandatory

The cabinet
control unit
(CCU)
monitors the
operating
environment
of the cabinet
and controls
equipment.
213
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect
trunk
signals, an
SLPU
configured
with the
UELP or
UFLP is
mandatory.
The SLPU is
installed in
the 1 U space
at the top of
the cabinet.
ETP
Mandatory
The
embedded
telecommuni
cation power
(ETP)
system
converts AC
power into
DC power
and supplies
power to all
the
equipment
inside the
cabinet. The
ETP consists
of the ETP
subrack,
PMU, and
PSUs.

214
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
R4850G2
Mandatory
The
R4850G2
converts 110
V AC or 220
V AC power
into -48 V
DC power.
It is
shortened to
PSU in this
document.
6
PMU 10 A
Mandatory
The power
monitoring
unit 10 A
(PMU 10 A)
provides the
following
functions:
power
system and
battery
management
, power
monitoring,
and alarm
reporting.
It is
shortened to
PMU in this
document.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
DCDU-11C
Mandatory

Direct
current
distribution
unit-11C
(DCDU-11C
) provides
ten DC
outputs for
the BBU,
CCU, and
CMUF in the
cabinet.
215
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
BBU
Mandatory
The
baseband
processing
unit
(BBU3900),
which
processes
baseband
signals, is
installed
under the
DCDU-11C.
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
Mandatory
The
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
provides DC
power to
RRUs. When
only one
DCDU-11B/
DCDU-03B
is
configured,
it is
preferentiall
y configured
in the left
slot.
10
PDU05A-03
Mandatory
The
PDU05A-3
provides AC
power for the
ETP.
11
Storage
battery
Optional
The storage
battery
provides
backup
power for a
base station.

216
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
12
CMUF
Mandatory
The central
monitoring
unit type F
(CMUF)
provides the
following
functions:
heat
exchanger
control, fan
speed
adjustment,
and ELU
identificatio
n.
13
HAU
Optional
The heater
assembly
unit (HAU)
ensures that
components
in the cabinet
work within
the
acceptable
temperature
range when
the
surrounding
temperature
is low. It is
optional.
14
Fan
Mandatory
Fans
dissipate
heat from a
cabinet.

217
DBS3900
Cabinet
Type
No.
Module/
Board
Optional or Maximum
Mandatory Number
Configure
d in a
Single
Cabinet
Descriptio
n
15
Space for
customer
equipment
The space for

customer
equipment is
5 U. It is
provided for
the SLPU,
EMUA, and
transmission
equipment.
16
Document
holder
Mandatory
The
document
holder is
used to hold
documents.
4.3 Engineering Specifications of Various Cabinets Used by

the DBS3900
This section describes the engineering specifications of various cabinets used by the DBS3900.
Engineering Specifications of the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinets

For the engineering specifications of the APM30, TMC, and BBC, see Engineering
Specifications of the APM30. APM is short for advanced power module, TMC is short for
transmission cabinet, and BBC is short for battery backup cabinet.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and IBBS200T
(Ver.A), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H. APM30H is short for advanced power
module with a heat exchanger, and TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), IBBS200T
(Ver.B), and IBBS200D (Ver.B), see Engineering Specifications of the APM30H, IBBS200T,
IBBS200D, and TMC11H.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), IBBS200T
(Ver.C), and IBBS200D (Ver.C), see Specifications of the APM30H, Specifications of the
TMC11H, Specifications of the IBBS200D, and Specifications of the IBBS200T, respectively.
For the engineering specifications of the APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), IBBS200D
(Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D), see Technical Specifications of an APM30H, Technical
Specifications of a TMC11H, and Technical Specifications of an IBBS200D, and Technical
Specifications of an IBBS200T, respectively.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

218
DBS3900
For details about the IBBS700D, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700D in
Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D.
For details about the IBBS700T, see Engineering Specifications of the IBBS700T in Engineering
Specifications of an IBBS700T.
Engineering Specifications of the OMB and OMB (Ver.C)

Table 4-9 lists the engineering specifications of the outdoor mini box (OMB).
Table 4-9 Engineering specifications of the OMB
Item
Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D)
600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45

in. x 15.35 in.)
Weight
OMB subrack: 15 kg (33.08 lb)

AC OMB: 25 kg (55.13 lb)
DC OMB: 22.5 kg (49.61 lb)
Ambient temperature
Without solar radiation: -40oC to +50oC

(-40oF to +122oF)
Short-term operation: 50oC to 55oC (122oF to
131oF)
NOTE
Short-term operation indicates that the continuous
operation time does not exceed 96 hours or the
accumulated operation time within a year does not
exceed 15 days.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Table 4-10 lists the engineering specifications of the OMB (Ver.C).

Table 4-10 Engineering specifications of the OMB (Ver.C)
Item
Specifications
600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45

in. x 16.93 in.)
Weight
AC OMB: 30 kg (66.14 lb)

DC OMB: 21 kg (46.30 lb)
Ambient temperature
-27.4 oF to 122 oF
NOTE
The temperature alarm lower threshold is -33oC
(-27.4oF).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

219
DBS3900
Item
Specifications
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Engineering Specifications of the IMB03

Table 4-11 lists the engineering specifications of the IMB03. IMB is short for indoor mini box.
Table 4-11 Engineering Specifications of the IMB03
Item
Specifications
560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x

16.73 in. x 7.09 in.)
Weight
10 kg (22.05 lb)
Ambient temperature
-4oF to 122oF
4.4 Components in DBS3900 Cabinets

This section describes the components in various DBS3900 cabinets.
4.4.1 Components in the APM, TMC, and Battery Cabinet

This section describes the components in the APM, TMC, and battery cabinet.
For the components in the APM30, TMC, and battery cabinet, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User
Guide.
For the components in the APM30H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.A), and battery cabinet, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide.
For the components in the APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), and battery cabinet, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.B) Product Description.
For the components in the APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), and battery cabinet, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product Description.
For the components in the APM30H(Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), and battery cabinets, see the
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.D) Product Description.
For details about the exterior, functions, specifications, and components of the IBBS700D and
IBBS700T, see IBBS700D&IBBS700T User Guide.
4.4.2 Components in the OMB

This section describes the components in the OMB configured for the DBS3900.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

220
DBS3900
HEUA
The Heat Exchange Unit Type A (HEUA) monitors the fans and reports the related alarms.
Structure
The HEUA is the heat exchange monitoring unit. Figure 4-15 shows the HEUA.
Figure 4-15 HEUA
Ports
Figure 4-16 shows the ports on the HEUA, and Table 4-12 describes the ports on the HEUA.
Figure 4-16 Ports on the HEUA
Table 4-12 Ports on the HEUA
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
SN
Port
Quantity
Function
3V3 power supply

port
Leading DC input
power to the HEUA

221
DBS3900
SN
Port
Quantity
Function
2 and 3
4-pin sockets
Providing the
terminals for the
power or alarm
signals of the two
outer air circulation
fans
LEDs
Indicating the
running status and
alarm status of the
fans
5 and 6
RJ45 ports
two RS485 signals

l COM OUT:
connecting to the
PMU or lowerlevel HEUA
l COM IN:
connecting to the
BBU or upperlevel HEUA
Short-circuiting cap
Differentiating the
APM30H or
TMC11H from other
cabinets
8 and 9
4-pin sockets
Providing the
terminals for the
power or alarm
signals of the two
inner air circulation
fans
AC/DC Power Equipment

The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distribution
box with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the
220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC power
to the components in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-17 shows the AC/DC power equipment.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

222
DBS3900
Figure 4-17 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket
(2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment
(4) Power switch for the RRU
(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment
(6) PSU
(7) Monitoring ports
(8) DC output port (LOAD1)
(10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries
Port
Table 4-13 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-13 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment
Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
AC power
supply socket
INPUT
AC input port
3-pin male connector
Monitoring
port
RS232
Reserved
RS485
Monitoring port for the PSU
RJ45 connector
COM
Reserved
LOAD1
Power port (10 A) for the

BBU and HEUA
H4
LOAD2

transmission equipment
H4
BATT

batteries
H4
RRU
Wiring terminal for feeding

power (12 A) into the RRU
power cable
OT terminal
TM

power (4 A) into the
OT terminal
DC output port
DC output
wiring
terminals
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

223
DBS3900
Indicator
Table 4-14 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-14 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Steady on
The module is running properly.
Steady off
An error occurs during the running

of the module.
Alarm indicator
Steady on
An output overcurrent alarm or

overtemperature alarm is
generated.
Blinking
The communication is interrupted.
Steady off
Steady on
A fan fault, output overvoltage, or

external short circuit occurs.
Steady off
ALARM
FAULT
Yellow
Red
Fault indicator
Table 4-15 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.
Table 4-15 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on
for 0.125s
and off for
0.125s)
The module is functional but

unable to communicate with the
PMU properly.
Steady on
An alarm is generated.
Steady off
No alarms is generated.
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
DIP Switch
Figure 4-18 shows the DIP switches.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

224
DBS3900
Figure 4-18 DIP Switches
Table 4-16 describes the settings of the DIP switches.

Table 4-16 Settings of the DIP switches
No.
Function
Setting
1 to 5
Used to define the

communication address of
the PMU.
(1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0

to Bit4, respectively. ON
indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0.
For example, if the
the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set
to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set
to OFF.
(2) The default settings are as
follows:
1 (Bit0) is set to ON;
3 (Bit2) is set to OFF;
5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

225
DBS3900
No.
Function
Setting
Selects a baud rate for

communicating with the
main control unit.
When 6 is set to ON, the baud

rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is
set to OFF, the baud rate is
19200 bit/s.
7 and 8
Reserved and undefined.
7 and 8 are set to OFF.
Specifications
Table 4-17 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-17 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment
Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V

AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to
135/270 V AC
Frequency of the input

voltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power

7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode
4 kV in common mode

The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.
Exterior
Figure 4-19 shows the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

226
DBS3900
Figure 4-19 Panel of the AC surge protection box
(1) Alarm port
(2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables
Port
Table 4-18 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Table 4-18 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box
Name
Label
Description
Connector
Alarm port
SPD ALM
Port for reporting the

AC input surge
protection alarm
(2) 2-Pin cord end

terminal
Wiring terminals for

the input power
cables
Wiring terminal for

the AC input power
cable
OT terminal
N
PE
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C) supplies DC power to each
component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U. It can be classified
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

227
DBS3900
into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured circuit breakers and application
scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior
Figure 4-20 shows the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-20 DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Functions
The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different circuit breaker
configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and
separated base stations.
Table 4-19 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-19 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU
20 A
LOAD6 to
LOAD8
BBU and the

transmission
equipment of
the customer
12 A
Distributed
base station/
Mini base
station
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
12 A
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
DCDU-03C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

Separated
macro base
station in the
-48 V DC
power
supply/
228
DBS3900
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
LOAD7
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
6A
Transmissio
n cabinet
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
Ports
Figure 4-21 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Figure 4-21 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Table 4-20 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.

Table 4-20 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Port
Specification
Power Cable CrossSectional Area
Remarks
DC input
terminal
Supports the
M6 2-hole OT
terminal (one
input)
Maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,
When the DCDU-03C is used

in the transmission cabinet,
the cross-sectional area of the
input power cable is 4 mm2.

229
DBS3900
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC output
terminal
Supports the
M4 single hole
OT terminal (9
outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2
l The specification for a

power cable depends on
the device to which the
cable is connected. For
example, the specification
for a fan power cable is 2.5
mm2.
l Three rows of wiring
terminals for outputs:
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
PGND, where, the last
three pairs of the PGND
wiring terminals support
the grounding of the M4 2hole OT terminals, which
are marked in red in
Figure 4-21
SPD ALM
SPD ALM
This port is unavailable.
Technical Specifications
Table 4-21 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C.
Table 4-21 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Item
Specification
Dimension (H x W x D)
The DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C is 1 U (44.45

mm or 1.75 in.) high and can be installed in a
19 inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as
follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
17.4 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)
Surge protection specifications of ports on

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
-48 V DC port, differential mode: 10kA

(8/20s)
-48 V DC port, common mode: 20kA
(8/20s)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

230
DBS3900
4.4.3 Components in the OMB (Ver.C)

This section describes the components in the OMB (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.OMB
is short for outdoor mini box.
HEUB
The heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status
of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge
protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.
Panel
Figure 4-22 shows the HEUB panel.
Figure 4-22 HEUB panel
(1) ELU
(2) ExtFAN
(3) IntFAN
(4) TEM
(5) AC_SPD
(6) GATE
(7) COM_IN
(8) COM_OUT
(9) PWR
Functions
The HEUB performs the following functions:
l
Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly.
Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information.
Collects the surge protection alarm information of power equipment when AC power is
used.
Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature
or controlled by the BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

231
DBS3900
Reports collected information to the BBU.
Ports
Table 4-22 describes the ports on the HEUB.
Table 4-22 Ports on the HEUB
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
ELU
RJ45 connector
Electronic label port
ExtFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the outer air

circulation fan
IntFAN
4-pin connector
Power port for the inner air

circulation fan
TEM
4-pin connector
Port connected to the

temperature sensor
AC_SPD
Bare wire
Port for collecting the AC

input surge protection alarm
GATE
Bare wire
Port for the door status sensor
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Port for reporting monitoring

signals
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Port connected to the

ETP48100-A1
PWR
3V3 power connector
-48 V DC input port
ETP48100-A1
The embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external 220 V or 110
V AC input power into -48 V DC power.
ETP48100-A1 Components
The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) system consists of the
power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A), power supply unit (PSU), and ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Figure 4-23 shows the ETP48100-A1 components.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

232
DBS3900
Figure 4-23 ETP48100-A1 components
(1) PMU 11A
(2) PSU
(3) ETP48100-A1 subrack
ETP48100-A1 Subrack
The embedded telecommunication power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) subrack houses the PMU
11A and PSU. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power.
Exterior
Figure 4-24 shows an ETP48100-A1 subrack.
Figure 4-24 ETP48100-A1 subrack
(1) AC input terminal
(2) Circuit breaker
(3) DC output terminal
Table 4-23 describes the ports on an ETP48100-A1 subrack.

Table 4-23 Ports on an ETP48100-A1 subrack
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Port
Silkscreen
Connector
AC input terminal
INPUT
OT terminal
Circuit breaker
LOAD0/LOAD1
DC output terminal
OUTPUT
OT terminal

233
DBS3900
PMU 11A
The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors power
distribution, and reports alarms.
Exterior
Figure 4-25 shows a PMU 11A.
Figure 4-25 PMU 11A
Functions
The PMU 11A performs the following functions:
l
Manages the power system.
Reports the battery temperature.
Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.
Ports
Figure 4-26 shows the ports on the PMU 11A and Table 4-24 describes these ports.
Figure 4-26 Ports on the PMU 11A
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

234
DBS3900
Table 4-24 Ports on the PMU 11A

No.
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
GATE
2-pin connector
Connects to a door status

sensor
TEM_BAT
2-pin connector
Reserved for a battery

temperature sensor
COM_IN
RJ45 connector
Connects to the BBU or

upper-level device and
reports alarms to the
BBU.
COM_OUT
RJ45 connector
Connects to the BBU or

lower-level devices and
collects alarms from
lower-level devices.
COM_485
RJ45 connector
Reserved
Indicators
Table 4-25 describes the indicators on the PMU 11A.
Table 4-25 Indicators on the PMU 11A
Silkscre
en
Color
Description
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Steady on
The PMU 11A is performing

startup, self-check, loading and
activation.
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
The PMU 11A is functional and

communicating with the BBU
properly. (This status does not
necessarily mean that the PMU
11A has been configured.)
Blinking (on
for 0.125s
and off for
0.125s)
The PMU 11A is functional but

unable to communicate properly.
Steady off
The PMU 11A is faulty or there is

no DC power supply.
Steady on
Steady off
ALM
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Red
Alarm indicator

235
DBS3900
Silkscre
en
Color
Description
Status
Description
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
An alarm is generated and you need

to locate the fault before deciding
whether to replace the PMU 11A.
DIP Switches
Figure 4-27 shows the DIP switches on the PMU 11A.
Figure 4-27 DIP switches on the PMU 11A

DIP Bit
Function
Setting
Four least
significan
t bits (1,
2, 3, and
4)
Define the
monitoring address
of the PMU.
The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits
1 to 4 are set to 1100 by default before delivery.
Four most
significan
t bits (5,
6, 7, and
8)
Reserved for future

use.
The bit 1 indicates ON, and the bit 0 indicates OFF. Bits
5 to 8 are set to 0000 by default before delivery.
PSU
The power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

236
DBS3900
Functions
The PSU implements the following functions:
l
Converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. The power monitoring unit
(PMU) adjusts the output voltage.
Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overheat.
Dissipates heat using built-in fans.
Exterior
Figure 4-28 shows the PSU exterior.
Figure 4-28 PSU exterior
NOTE
A scanner is required for stock management to scan the two-dimensional bar code on the front panel of the
PSU.
Indicators
Figure 4-29 shows the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.
Figure 4-29 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU
(1) Power indicator
(2) Protection indicator
(3) Fault indicator
Table 4-27 describes the indicators on the front panel of the PSU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

237
DBS3900
Table 4-27 Indicators on the front panel of the PSU

Indicat
or
Color
Status
Description
Power
indicato
r
Green
Steady on
The PSU is functioning properly.
Steady off
The PSU is experiencing a mains supply

fault, or the PSU is faulty.
Protecti
on
indicato
r
Yellow
Steady off
Steady on
An alarm triggered by an external factor is

generated.
Blinking (on for 1s and

off for 1s)
The communication between the PSU and the

PMU is interrupted.
Steady off
Steady on
The PSU is faulty or shut down in case of an

emergency. Diagnose the fault to determine
whether to replace the PSU.
Fault
indicato
r
Red
PDU10D-01
The power distribution unit 10D-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power to all components
in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-30 shows a PDU10D-01.
Figure 4-30 PDU10D-01
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

238
DBS3900
Functions
The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions:
l
Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.
Provides ten DC outputs with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, and
two reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-31 shows ports on the PDU10D-01 and Table 4-28 describes these ports.
Figure 4-31 Ports on the PDU10D-01
Table 4-28 Ports on the PDU10D-01

No
.
1
Port
Silkscreen
Matched
Terminal and
Cable
Description
DC input
terminals
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6). The
maximum crosssectional area of the
cable supported is
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
for one input or 16
mm2 (0.025 in.2) for
two inputs.
Negative power input wiring

terminal
RTN(+)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

Positive power input wiring

terminal
239
DBS3900
No
.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched
Terminal and
Cable
Description
AC input
terminals
L, N, PE
One-hole OT
terminal (M4). The
cable supported is 4
mm2 (0.0062 2).
The maximum input current

for a single input is 30 A.
DC output
terminals
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Figure 4-32 shows

the EPC5
connectors for ports
LOAD0 to LOAD5.
The maximum
cross-sectional area
of the cable is 10
mm2 (0.016 in.2).
The output current is 30 A.
DC output
terminals
LOAD6 to
LOAD9
Figure 4-33 shows

an EPC4/EPC6
connector, which
applies to any one
among ports
LOAD6 to LOAD9.
The maximum
of the cable is 4
mm2 (0.006 in.2).
The output current is 30 A.
NOTE
Figure 4-33 shows
an EPC4 or EPC6
connector. An EPC4
connector must be
connected to a cable
onsite, whereas an
EPC6 connector has
been connected to a
cable before
delivery. The EPC5
connector must be
connected to the
cable onsite.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

240
DBS3900
No
.
5
Port
Silkscreen
Matched
Terminal and
Cable
Description
Spare fuse
box
There are three fuses in the

spare fuse box:
l Two 5 A spare fuses, each
used for transferring
power less than 150 W.
l One 30 A spare fuse, used
for the 30 A output power
ports on the PDU10D-01.
Figure 4-32 Exterior of an EPC5 connector
Figure 4-33 Exterior of an EPC4 or EPC6 connector

The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power.
Exterior
Figure 4-34 shows the panel of an AC surge protection box.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

241
DBS3900
Figure 4-34 Panel of the AC surge protection box
(1) AC surge protection box
(2) Alarm port
(3) AC power supply ports
Ports
Table 4-29 describes the ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box.
Table 4-29 Ports on the panel of the AC surge protection box
Port Type
Silkscreen
Connector
Description
Port for alarm

reporting
ALARM
Bare wire
Port for collecting

the AC input surge
protection alarm
AC power supply
port
Cord end terminal
AC power supply
port
N
PE
4.4.4 Components in the IMB03

This section describes the components in the IMB03 configured for the DBS3900.
AC/DC Power Equipment

The AC/DC power equipment consists of a 4815 power system and a DC power distribution
box with two outputs. The equipment leads 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, converts the
220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supplies -48 V DC power
to the components in the cabinet.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

242
DBS3900
Exterior
Figure 4-35 shows the AC/DC power equipment.
Figure 4-35 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket
(2) Wiring terminal for the RRU
(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment
(4) Power switch for the RRU
(5) Power switch for the transmission equipment
(6) PSU
(7) Monitoring ports
(10) Output port (BATT) for the batteries
Port
Table 4-30 describes the ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-30 Ports on the panel of the AC/DC power equipment
Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
AC power
supply socket
INPUT
AC input port
3-pin male connector
Monitoring
port
RS232
Reserved
RS485
Monitoring port for the PSU
RJ45 connector
COM
Reserved
LOAD1

BBU and HEUA
H4
LOAD2

H4
BATT

batteries
H4
RRU

power (12 A) into the RRU
power cable
OT terminal
DC output port
DC output
wiring
terminals
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

243
DBS3900
Port Type
Label
Description
Connector
TM

power (4 A) into the
OT terminal
Indicator
Table 4-31 describes the indicators on the panel of the PSU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-31 Indicators on the panel of the PSU
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Steady on
Steady off
An error occurs during the running

of the module.
Alarm indicator
Steady on
An output overcurrent alarm or

overtemperature alarm is
generated.
Blinking
The communication is interrupted.
Steady off
Steady on
A fan fault, output overvoltage, or

external short circuit occurs.
Steady off
ALARM
FAULT
Yellow
Red
Fault indicator
Table 4-32 describes the indicators on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power
equipment.
Table 4-32 Indicators on the panel of the monitoring module
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
RUN
Green
Running status
indicator
Blinking (on
for 1s and off
for 1s)
Blinking (on
for 0.125s
and off for
0.125s)
The module is functional but

unable to communicate with the
PMU properly.
Steady on
ALM
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Red
Alarm indicator

244
DBS3900
Label
Color
Name
Status
Description
Steady off
DIP Switch
Figure 4-36 shows the DIP switches.
Figure 4-36 DIP Switches
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

245
DBS3900

No.
Function
Setting
1 to 5
Used to define the

the PMU.
(1) 1 to 5 correspond to Bit0

to Bit4, respectively. ON
indicates 1, and OFF
indicates 0.
For example, if the
the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set
to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set
to OFF.
(2) The default settings are as
follows:
5 (Bit4) is set to OFF.
Selects a baud rate for

communicating with the
main control unit.
When 6 is set to ON, the baud

rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is
set to OFF, the baud rate is
19200 bit/s.
7 and 8
Reserved and undefined.
7 and 8 are set to OFF.
Specifications
Table 4-34 describes the specifications of the AC/DC power equipment.
Table 4-34 Specifications of the AC/DC power equipment
Item
Specifications
Input voltage
220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V

AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to
135/270 V AC
Frequency of the input

voltage
45 Hz to 65 Hz
Output voltage
Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC
Output current
15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power

7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

246
DBS3900
Item
Specifications
Surge protection capability
2 kV in differential mode
4 kV in common mode
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Exterior
Functions
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU
20 A
Distributed
base station/

247
DBS3900
DCDU
Model
DCDU-03C
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
LOAD6 to
LOAD8
BBU and the

transmission
equipment of
the customer
12 A
Mini base
station
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
12 A
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
LOAD7
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
6A
Separated
macro base
station in the
-48 V DC
power
supply/
Transmissio
n cabinet
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
Ports

Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

248
DBS3900

Port
Specification
Remarks
DC input
terminal
Supports the
M6 2-hole OT
terminal (one
input)
Maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,

DC output
terminal
Supports the
M4 single hole
OT terminal (9
outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2

mm2.
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
Figure 4-38
SPD ALM
SPD ALM
Item
Specification

follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

(8/20s)

249
DBS3900
Item
Specification
(8/20s)
DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
components in the cabinet.
Exterior
Figure 4-39 and Figure 4-40 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.
Figure 4-39 Front view of a DCDU-12B
(1) DC input terminal
(3) Spare fuse box
(4) Ground point
Figure 4-40 Rear view of a DCDU-12B
(1) Ground point
NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

250
DBS3900
Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.
Table 4-38 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.
Table 4-38 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B
DCDU Type
DC output
ports
PowerConsuming
Device
Specificatio
n of the
Fuse
Remarks
DCDU-12B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5
30 A
l BTS3900
LOAD6
BBU or
transmission
device
l BTS3900A
LOAD7
BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
device
LOAD9
Fan assembly
l DBS3900
l Mini NodeB
NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
l The LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals are connected to cables with a cross-sectional area of 3.3mm2 (0.005
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-41 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

251
DBS3900
Figure 4-41 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel
Table 4-39 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.
Table 4-39 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input
terminals
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6) with
two inputs. The
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2).

terminal
RTN(+)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)


terminal
252
DBS3900
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(2)
Fuse
block
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
It controls ports LOAD0 to

LOAD9, and therefore controls
the power supplies to the BBU,
fan assemblies, and
transmission equipment.
The indicator on the fuse block
indicates the status of the fuse.
l When the indicator is steady
on, the fuse is faulty and
needs to be replaced.
off, the fuse is working
properly.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

253
DBS3900
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(3)
DC
output
ports
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
l Figure 4-42
shows the EPC5
connectors for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
area of the cable is
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2
(0.015 in.2).
For the specifications of the DC

output, see Table 4-38.
l Figure 4-43
shows an EPC4/
EPC6 connector,
which applies to
any one among
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
NOTE
Figure 4-43 shows an
EPC4 or EPC6
connector. An EPC4
connector must be
onsite, whereas an
EPC6 connector has
been connected to a
cable before delivery.
The EPC5 connector
must be connected to
the cable onsite.
(4)
Spare
fuse box
There are three 30 A spare fuses

in the spare fuse box.
NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

254
DBS3900
Table 4-40 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.
Table 4-40 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B
Item
Specifications
The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be

installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its
dimensions are as follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4
in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x
Surge Protection Specifications
-48 V DC power port, 10 kA (8/20 s)

differential mode
common mode
4.4.5 Components Used for Installation on a Wall or 19-inch Rack

This section describes the components to be used for installing the BBU3900 on a wall or 19inch rack.
DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

255
DBS3900
Exterior
Functions
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU
20 A
LOAD6 to
LOAD8
BBU and the

transmission
equipment of
the customer
12 A
Distributed
base station/
Mini base
station
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
12 A
LOAD6
BBU
12 A
DCDU-03C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

Separated
macro base
station in the
-48 V DC
power
supply/
256
DBS3900
DCDU
Model
DC Output
Terminal
Power
Consumpti
on
Equipment
circuit
breaker
Specificati
on
circuit
breaker
Quantity
Applicatio
n Scenario
LOAD7
Transmissio
n equipment
of the
customer
6A
Transmissio
n cabinet
LOAD8
Fan box
6A
Ports

Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC input
terminal
Supports the
M6 2-hole OT
terminal (one
input)
Maximum = 25mm2,
default = 16mm2,


257
DBS3900
Port
Specification
Remarks
DC output
terminal
Supports the
M4 single hole
OT terminal (9
outputs)
Maximum = 6mm2

mm2.
NEG(-), RTN(+), and
Figure 4-45
SPD ALM
SPD ALM
Item
Specification

follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x

DCDU-03B/DCDU-03C

(8/20s)
(8/20s)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

258
DBS3900
DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C

The DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supply
power to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications,
and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.
Exterior
Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
respectively.
Figure 4-46 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Figure 4-47 Rear view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

259
DBS3900

NOTE
The DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B uses
the equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the open
rack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device,
which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear of
the DCDU-11B.
Function
The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breaker
configurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro base
station.
Table 4-44 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
DCDU
Type
DC
Output
Termina
l
Equipment
Circuit
Breaker
Specifica
tions
Circuit
Breaker
Description
DCDU-11
B
LOAD0
to
LOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5
25 A
SW0 to
SW5
Distributed or
mini base station
LOAD6
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW6
LOAD7
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW7
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
equipment
25 A
SW8
LOAD9
Fan assembly
25 A
SW9
LOAD0
Transmission
equipment
6A
SW0
LOAD1
Transmission
equipment
6A
SW1
LOAD2
Transmission
equipment
12 A
SW2
LOAD3
Transmission
equipment
12 A
SW3
LOAD4
Transmission
equipment
25 A
SW4
DCDU-11
C
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

-48 V outdoor
macro base
station or
transmission
cabinet
260
DBS3900
DCDU
Type
DC
Output
Termina
l
Equipment
Circuit
Breaker
Specifica
tions
Circuit
Breaker
LOAD5
Transmission
equipment
25 A
SW5
LOAD6
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW6
LOAD7
BBU or transmission
equipment
25 A
SW7
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
equipment
25 A
SW8
LOAD9
Fan assembly
25 A
SW9
Description
Ports
Figure 4-48 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Table 4-45 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

261
DBS3900
Table 4-45 Specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C

S
N
Port
Label
Terminal and
Cable
Description
(1)
DC input
terminal
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6) with
two inputs. The
cable is 35mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25mm2
(0.039in.2) in two
inputs.

terminal
RTN(+)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)


terminal
262
DBS3900
S
N
Port
Label
Terminal and
Cable
Description
(2)
DC
output
terminal
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
DCDU-11B:
For details about DC output

specifications, see Table 4-44.
l Figure 4-49
shows an toolless female
connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
terminals. The
cross-sectional
area is 3.3mm2
(0.005 in.2) to
10mm2 (0.015 in.
2).
l Figure 4-50
shows an toolless female
connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to
LOAD6 to
LOAD9
terminals. The
maximum crosssectional area is
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
DCDU-11C: Figure
4-50 shows an toolless female connector
(pressfit type)
adapting to LOAD0
to LOAD9 terminals.
The cross-sectional
area is 1.5mm2
(0.002 in.2) to 4mm2
(0.006 in.2).
(3)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Circuit
breaker
SW0 to SW9

The circuit breakers SW0 to

SW9 control the ports LOAD0
to LOAD9 respectively,
controlling the power supplies
to the BBU, fan assembly, and
263
DBS3900
Figure 4-49 tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (1)
Figure 4-50 tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (2)
Table 4-46 describes the technical specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C.
Table 4-46 Technical Specifications of the DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C
Item
Specification

follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x
ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x

DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C

(8/20s)
(8/20s)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

264
DBS3900
DCDU-12B
A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) is 1 U high and provides DC power for all
Exterior
Figure 4-51 and Figure 4-52 show exterior of a DCDU-12B.
Figure 4-51 Front view of a DCDU-12B
(1) DC input terminal
(3) Spare fuse box
(4) Ground point
Figure 4-52 Rear view of a DCDU-12B
(1) Ground point
NOTE
The DCDU-12B uses the equipotential connection point and ground point in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1: The DCDU-12B is installed on an open subrack. An equipotential cable connects the
equipotential connection point near the mounting ear of the DCDU-12B to the ground bar of the open
rack.
l Scenario 2: The DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. The ground
point at the rear of the DCDU-12B is connected to the ground bar in the cabinet.
Functions
The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using same fuse configurations to meet the
power distribution requirements of different distributed base stations.
Table 4-47 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

265
DBS3900
Table 4-47 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-12B

DCDU Type
DC output
ports
PowerConsuming
Device
Specificatio
n of the
Fuse
Remarks
DCDU-12B
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
RRU0 to RRU5
30 A
l BTS3900
LOAD6
BBU or
transmission
device
l BTS3900A
LOAD7
BBU or
transmission
device
LOAD8
EMUA or
transmission
device
LOAD9
Fan assembly
l DBS3900
l Mini NodeB
NOTE
It is recommended that the power output terminals on the DCDU-12B be connected as follows:
in.2) to 10mm2 (0.015 in.2) to provide power for RRU 0 to RRU 5.
in.2) to 4mm2(0.006 in.2) to provide power for RRU 6 to RRU 8.
l The LOAD9 terminal is reserved.
Ports
Figure 4-53 shows the ports on the DCDU-12B panel.
Figure 4-53 Ports on the DCDU-12B panel
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

266
DBS3900
Table 4-48 shows the terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel.
Table 4-48 Terminals and switches on the DCDU-12B panel
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(1)
DC input
terminals
NEG(-)
One-hole OT
terminal (M6) with
two inputs. The
cable is 35 mm2
(0.054 in.2) in one
input or 25 mm2
(0.039 in.2)in two
inputs. The default
is 16 mm2 (0.025 in.
2).

terminal
It controls ports LOAD0 to

LOAD9, and therefore controls
the power supplies to the BBU,
fan assemblies, and
RTN(+)
(2)
Fuse
block
LOAD0 to
LOAD9

terminal
The indicator on the fuse block

indicates the status of the fuse.
on, the fuse is faulty and
needs to be replaced.
off, the fuse is working
properly.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

267
DBS3900
N
o.
Port
Silkscreen
Matched Terminal
and Cable
Remarks
(3)
DC
output
ports
LOAD0 to
LOAD9
l Figure 4-54
shows the EPC5
connectors for
ports LOAD0 to
LOAD5. The
cross-sectional
3.3mm2 (0.005 in.
2) to 10mm2
(0.015 in.2).
For the specifications of the DC

output, see Table 4-47.
l Figure 4-55
shows an EPC4/
EPC6 connector,
which applies to
any one among
ports LOAD6 to
LOAD9. The
cross-sectional
1.5mm2 (0.002 in.
2) to 4mm2(0.006
in.2).
NOTE
Figure 4-55 shows an
EPC4 or EPC6
connector. An EPC4
connector must be
onsite, whereas an
EPC6 connector has
been connected to a
cable before delivery.
The EPC5 connector
must be connected to
the cable onsite.
(4)
Spare
fuse box
There are three 30 A spare fuses

in the spare fuse box.
NOTE
Fuse blocks and DC output terminals are jointly called fuse terminal blocks.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

268
DBS3900
Table 4-49 lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B.
Table 4-49 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B
Item
Specifications
The DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be

installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its
dimensions are as follows:
l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.4
in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears)
l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x
Surge Protection Specifications

differential mode
common mode
4.5 Engineering Specifications of Internal Equipment

The equipment in the various DBS3900 cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering
specifications.
The equipment installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, and TMC11H (Ver.A) must
meet the following requirements for engineering specifications:
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

269
DBS3900
Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-56)

Width: 19 inches
Depth: less than or equal to 310 mm (12.2 in.) for the equipment using natural ventilation
or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the
equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear.
Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.)
Requirement for air vents:

If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right
and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to
back.
If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be
reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
Requirement for temperature:

Table 4-50 Temperature requirements for user equipment
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Highest Environmental
Temperature
Lowest Operating
Temperature of the User
Equipment
Equal to or lower than 40

C
Equal to or lower than -10 Equal to or higher than 55

C
C
Higher than 40C

C
C

Highest Operating
Equipment
270
DBS3900
Figure 4-56 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(1) Equipment using natural

ventilation
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out
from its left and right
from its front and rear
The equipment installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.B), and
TMC11H (Ver.C) must meet the following requirements for engineering specifications:
l
Dimensions (as shown in Figure 4-56)

Width: 19 inch
Depth: less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.) for the equipment using natural
ventilation or dissipating heat out from its left and right; less than 250 mm (9.84 in.) for
the equipment dissipating heat out from its front and rear.
Cabling space in front of the front panel: less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.)
Requirement for air vents:

If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right
and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to
back.
If the customer equipment supports natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be
reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Requirement for temperature:

271
DBS3900
Table 4-51 Temperature requirements for user equipment

Highest Environmental
Temperature
Lowest Operating
Equipment
Highest Operating
Equipment
Equal to or lower than 40

C

C
C
Higher than 40C

C
C
Figure 4-57 Requirements for the dimensions and heat dissipation of the internal equipment
(1) Equipment using natural

ventilation
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
(2) Equipment dissipating heat out (3) Equipment dissipating heat out
from its left and right
from its front and rear

272
DBS3900
DBS3900 Power System
About This Chapter

The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When
AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to
-48 V DC power for the base station.
Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900.
Table 5-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges
Power Input Type
Rated Voltage
Working Voltage
220 V AC single-phase
200 V AC to 240 V AC
176 V AC to 290 V AC
220/380 V AC three-phase
200/346 V AC to 240/415 V
AC
176/304 V AC to 290/500 V
AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire
100/200 V AC to 120/240 V
AC
90/180 V AC to 135/270 V
AC
Table 5-2 -48 V DC input voltage range

Power Supply
Rated Voltage
-48 V DC
-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Table 5-3 +24 V DC input voltage range
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power Supply
Rated Voltage
+24 V DC
+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

273
DBS3900
5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables

This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
various DBS3900 cabinets.
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes
This section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in the
power supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

274
DBS3900
5.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and

Power Cables
This section describes the requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
various DBS3900 cabinets.
5.1.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/

APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The recommended configurations are
all based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in
the cabinet and the maximum configurations of cabinet combinations. The power requirements
for the customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
NOTE
In the following tables, P is short for pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supply in the APM30 or APM30H
(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
are listed in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the APM30 or
APM30H (Ver.A)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase
1 x 32 A/1 P
4mm2 (0.006 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
220 V AC threephase
1 x 20 A/3 P
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
110 V AC dual-livewire
1 x 32 A/2 P
4mm2 (0.006 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supply in the TMC or TMC11H
(Ver.A), the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
are listed in Table 5-5.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

275
DBS3900
Table 5-5 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in the TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1 x 63 A/
1 P, maximum: 1 x 80
A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)
5.1.2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H

(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
This section lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the
APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a
heat exchanger. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base
station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum
configurations of cabinet combinations. The power capacities for the customer equipment in the
cabinet are also included.
NOTE
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU3900 is installed
in the APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the
APM30H (Ver.B)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
1x50 A/1 P
6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
1x50 A/2 P
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)

276
DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the APM30H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
APM30H (Ver.C)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
1x63 A/2 P
16mm2
220 V AC threephase
1x25 A/3 P
4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the TMC11H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables are listed in Table 5-8. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat
exchanger.
TMC11H (Ver.B)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A/1

P, maximum: 1x80
A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)
the TMC11H (Ver.C), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

277
DBS3900
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)
Cross-Sectional Area of the

Power Cable
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
1x80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of 10 m

(32.81 ft)
DC input power cables
1x63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

1x160 A
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2) low smoke

zero halogen (LSZH), a group
of DC input power cables
2x80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), two groups

of DC input power cables(7)
1x80 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

1x100 A

l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
l 1 BBU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

278
DBS3900
Maximum
Configuration (1)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

Power Cable
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
2x63 A

l 1 to 3 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
1x63 A
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

1x100 A

of DC input power cables (7)
2x63 A

1x160 A

2x63 A

1x160 A

(2)(3)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 3 RRUs (power <
300 W)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 3 RRUs (power <
300 W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power < 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

279
DBS3900
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power < 560
W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

Power Cable
2x63 A

Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W) (6)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

280
DBS3900

NOTE
(1) The maximum power of different types of RRUs is as follows:

l
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3008,
RRU3805, RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3222, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203,
RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, and
RRU3942.
(2) When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit
breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originally
configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, the
circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.
DCDU-11B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller
configurations.
(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller
load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order of load capacity as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A >
2x63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l
Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and
then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRXs in the base station. To power off the base station, first
turn off the circuit breakers for all TRXs and then turn off the circuit breakers for both groups of
power inputs.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with DC power supplied, a heater must be installed in
a TMC cabinet, and one more AC power input must be added. The recommended configurations
of circuit breakers and power cables in this circumstance are listed in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breakers and power cables
for the heater
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Description of
Input Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power
1 x 10 A/1 P
1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)
15 m (39.37 ft.)

281
DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with +24 V DC power supplied and is configured with
a APM30H (Ver.B), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power
cables are listed in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in
the APM30H (Ver.B)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
+24 V DC
Minimum: 1x160 A,
maximum: 2x100 A
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)

This section lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the
APM30H (Ver.D). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat exchanger. The
recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base station, which means the
full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum configurations of combined
cabinets. The power requirements of customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
NOTE
a pole.
When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors with AC power supplied and the BBU is installed in
the APM30H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
the APM30H (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x40 A/3 P
6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)
1x100 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
1x100 A/1 P

282
DBS3900
the TMC11H (Ver.D), the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
the TMC11H (Ver.D)
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

Power Cable
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of 10 m

(32.81 ft)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

1x160 A/1 P
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), low smoke

2x80 A/1 P

1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power < 300 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (400
W power <
560 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

283
DBS3900
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 4 to 6 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

Power Cable
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a groups of

DC input power cables(7)
1x63 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

1x100 A/1 P

2x63 A/1 P

1x160 A/1 P

2x63 A/1 P

Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 1 to 3 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 3 RRUs (power <
300 W)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 3 RRUs (power <
300 W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power < 560
W)
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

284
DBS3900
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power < 400
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power < 560
W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

Power Cable
1x160 A/1 P

2x63 A/1 P

1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/

1P

1x100 A/1 P+1x63

A/1 P
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), a group of

Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
l 1 BBU
l Transmission
equipment
(power 350
W)(6)
l 7 to 9 RRUs
(power
consumption
300 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs (300
W power <
400 W)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of

l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 7 to 9 RRUs
(power
consumption
560 W)
2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/

1P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), three

groups of DC input power
cables
1x160 A/1 P+1x80

A/1 P

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power
consumption
300 W)
2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/

1 P (default)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), three

cables
2x80 A/1 P

l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

285
DBS3900
Maximum
Configuration (1)
(2)(3)
l 12 RRUs (300 W
power
consumption
400 W)
Minimum
Specification of
the Circuit
Breakers on the
Customer
Equipment(4)(5)

Power Cable
1x100 A/1 P+1x80

A/1 P
35 mm2 (0.054 in.2), a group of

16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), a group of
l 1 or 2 BBUs
l 12 RRUs (power
consumption
560 W)
l 1 or 2 BBUs
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Length of
the Input
Power
Cable
2x63 A/1 P+1x80 A/

1P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2), three

cables
2x160 A/1 P

zero halogen (LSZH), two
group of DC input power cables
4x80 A/1 P (default)


286
DBS3900

NOTE
(1) The maximum power of different types of RRUs is as follows:

l
The maximum power of the following types of RRUs does not exceed 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C,
RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3824, RRU3826, and RRU3838.
RRU3232, RRU3936, RRU3832, and RRU3926.
RRU3929, RRU3241, RRU3221, RRU3201, RRU3233, RRU3829, RRU3240, RRU3229, and
RRU3942.
(3) When the customer power supply is sufficient, the recommended specification of circuit breakers is
based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs to meet all configurations. When the originally
configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements of full configuration of high-power RRUs, the
circuit breakers need to be replaced during capacity expansion.
(4) When more than six RRUs are configured, a minimum of two DCDU-11Bs need to be configured.
DCDU-12B is short for direct current distribution unit type B.
(5) The circuit breakers used for a configuration meet the requirements for all relatively smaller
configurations.
(6) The circuit breakers that meet a load meet the requirements for all scenarios with a relatively smaller
load. The circuit breakers are arranged in descending order as follows: 160 A > 2x80 A > 2x63 A > 100
A > 80 A > 63 A
(7) When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers
corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit
breakers that support 350 W.
(8) When two groups of power inputs are used, they must meet the following requirements:
l
Both groups of power inputs are from the same power cabinet.
Both groups of power inputs use the circuit breakers of the same specification and model.
Both groups of power inputs use power cables of the same core diameter and length.
To power on the base station, first turn on the circuit breakers for both groups of power inputs and
then turn on the circuit breakers for all TRX modules in the base station. To power off the base station,
first turn off the circuit breakers for all TRX modules and then turn off the circuit breakers for both
groups of power inputs.
5.1.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB

(Ver.C)
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cable for the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet. The recommended configurations are all
based on a fully configured base station, which means the full configurations of modules in the
cabinet and the maximum configurations of combined cabinets. The power requirements of the
customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
When the BBU installed in an OMB or OMB (Ver.C) is supplied with power from the customer
equipment, the circuit breaker on the customer equipment should be of 15 A to 25 A.
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB or
OMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are
separately listed in Table 5-14 and Table 5-15.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

287
DBS3900
Table 5-14 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB
cabinet
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
1x10 A
4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)
40m
Table 5-15 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable for the OMB
(Ver.C) cabinet
Power Supply
Product
Configuration
Requirement
for the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
CrossSectional
Area of the
Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power
Cable
220 V AC
single-phase
1PSU
20 A/1 P
15m
2PSU
32 A/1 P
4 mm2 (0.006 in.

2)
110 V AC duallive-wire
1PSU
20 A/2 P
2PSU
32 A/2 P
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU is installed in the OMB or
OMB (Ver.C), the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are
separately listed in Table 5-16 and Table 5-17.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

288
DBS3900
Table 5-16 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable
(with DC power supplied and OMB used)
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A,
maximum: 1x80 A
(all using the level-1
magnetic blast
breaker)
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
15m
Table 5-17 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable
(with DC power supplied and OMB (Ver.C) used)
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
50 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
10 m (32.81 ft)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

289
DBS3900
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
80 A/1 P
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
63 A/1 P
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/2 P
2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.

2)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

290
DBS3900
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
l 1 to 3 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
80 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
125 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/2 P
2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.

2)
80 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 4 to 6 RRUs
(power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
l 3 RRUs (300 W
power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

291
DBS3900
Product
Configuration
consumption
200 W)
l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 300
W)
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
2x63 A/2 P
2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.

2)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
2x63 A/2 P
2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.

2)
100 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
l 3 RRUs (power
consumption of
each RRU 400
W)
l 3 RRUs (400 W
power
consumption of
each RRU 560
W)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

292
DBS3900
Product
Configuration
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
l 1 BBU (power
consumption
450 W)
2x63 A/2 P
2x16 mm2 (0.025 in.

2)
Length of the
Input Power Cable
l Transmission
equipment
(power
consumption
200 W)
NOTE
(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows:

l
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is equal to or less than 300 W: RRU3804,
RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, and RRU3004.
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W: RRU3908,
RRU3928, and RRU3222.
The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 400 W to 560 W: RRU3829,
RRU3229, RRU3241, and RRU3942.
5.1.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06,

19-inch Rack or Wall
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and
power cable in the scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an IMB03/IFS06/19inch rack or on a wall. The recommended configurations are all based on a fully configured base
station, which means the full configurations of modules in the cabinet and the maximum
configurations of combined cabinets. The power requirements of the customer equipment in the
cabinet are also included.
NOTE
a pole.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

293
DBS3900
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03,
the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately listed in
Table 5-18 and Table 5-19. When the DBS3900 is supplied with the DC power and the BBU
is installed in the 19-inch rack or on a wall indoors, the configurations of the upper-level circuit
breaker and power cable are separately listed in Table 5-19.
Table 5-18 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable when the IMB03
is used in the AC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
1x10 A
4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)
40 m (131.23 ft)
is used in the DC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
Minimum: 1x63 A/1

P, maximum: 1x80
A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)
When the DBS3900 is supplied with the AC or DC power and the BBU is installed in the IMB03
+IFS06, the configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cable are separately
listed in Table 5-20 and Table 5-21.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

294
DBS3900
+IFS06 is used in the AC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
220 V AC threephase
1x16 A/3 P
2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)
1x32 A/1 P
4 mm2 (0.006 in.2)
1x32 A/2 P
+IFS06 is used in the DC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Requirement for
the Circuit
Breaker on
Customer
Equipment
Cross-Sectional
Area of the Power
Cable
Length of the
Input Power Cable
-48 V DC
1x80 A/1 P
16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)
15 m (49.21 ft)
+24 V DC
2x100 A/1 P
25 mm2 (0.039 in.2)
1x160 A/1 P
5.1.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A

Cabinet
This section describes the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and
power cables for the TP48600A cabinet. The recommended configurations are all based on a
fully configured base station, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the
customer equipment in the cabinet are also included.
Table 5-22 lists the recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power
cables for the TP48600A cabinet.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

295
DBS3900
Table 5-22 Recommended configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables
Power Supply
Product
Configuration
Requirement
for the Circuit
Breakers on
Customer
Equipment
CrossSectional
Area of the
Power Cable
Length of the
Input Power
Cable
220 V AC threephase
7 power supply
units (PSUs)+1
service outlet
unit (SOU)
63 A/3 P(1)
(recommended)
10 mm2 (0.016
in.2)
15 m (49.21
ft)
4 to 6 PSUs+1
SOU
40 A/3 P
4 to 7 PSUs+1
HAU+1 SOU
63 A/3 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
(recommended)
35 mm2 (0.054
in.2)
15 m (49.21
ft)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/1 P
6 PSUs+1 HAU
+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
5 PSUs+1 HAU
+1 SOU
125 A/1 P
4 PSUs+1 HAU
+1 SOU
100 A/1 P
7 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
(recommended)
35 mm2 (0.054
in.2)
15 m (49.21
ft)
6 PSUs+1 SOU
125 A/2 P
5 PSUs+1 SOU
100 A/2 P
4 PSUs+1 SOU
80 A/2 P
220 V AC
single-phase
110 V AC duallive-wire
NOTE
(1) P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.
5.2 Power Distribution Schemes

This section describes the power distribution schemes for various DBS3900 cabinets in the
power supply scenarios such as 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

296
DBS3900
5.2.1 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30/

APM30H(Ver.A) Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30/
APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Power Distribution Scheme in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the power
distribution unit (PDU) in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power into DC power.
The PDU converts one AC power input into two AC outputs and ten DC outputs.
Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 V
AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the circuit
breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-1 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 220 V AC single-phase power
supply scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

297
DBS3900
Figure 5-2 Power distribution scheme for the APM30 in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power
supply scenario
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-23 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the base station in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-3 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC single-phase
power supply scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

298
DBS3900
Figure 5-4 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire
Table 5-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30/APM30H (Ver.B) in
the AC power supply scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers
for the PDU
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
220 V AC singlephase/three-phase
3 x 16 A (MCB1)
l Heater: 1 x 10 A
l RRU: 6 20 A
l BBU: 1 12 A
2 x 30 A (MCB)
l Heating film: 1 x
10 A
l FAN: 1 12 A
l TM2: 2 4 A
NOTE
(1) Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)

(2) TM: Transmission equipment
When the DBS3900 uses AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission
cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission device, fan box,
and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in Figure
5-5.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

299
DBS3900
Figure 5-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the
AC power supply
Table 5-24 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
DBS3900 uses the AC power supply
Table 5-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
uses the AC power supply
Application Scenario
Power Supply
Specifications of DC
Output Circuit Breakers
APM30/APM30H (Ver.A) +
Transmission cabinet
220 V AC
l TM: 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1
x 6 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1 x 6 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Scheme in the -48V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 is supplied with -48 V DC power, the external power is supplied to the
TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A), and forwarded to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components in
the cabinet through the DC power distribution box.
Figure 5-6 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A). Table 5-25
lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

300
DBS3900
Figure 5-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Table 5-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A) in the -48 V DC
Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Circuit

Breakers
TMC/TMC11H (Ver.A)
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6 20 A (MCB)

l BBU: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
l TM: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1 x 12 A (MCB)
5.2.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)

or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power
supply scenarios. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat exchanger.
Power Distribution Principles in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by the
embedded power system (EPS) or embedded power subrack unit (EPU) and distributed to
After going through the EPS or EPU, one AC power input is divided into two AC power outputs:
l
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
One provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).

301
DBS3900
One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery
cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other
equipment.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be
connected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the
same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) in
the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 5-26 lists the specifications of
circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the
220 V AC single-phase power supply
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

302
DBS3900
Figure 5-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) when the DBS3900 uses the
110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-26 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) when the
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers of
the EPS
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
3x16 A (MCB(1))
l Heater and SOU:

1x16 A (MCB)
l Battery (BAT)(2):
1x100 A (MCB)
1x40 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x16 A
(MCB)
l RRU: 6x20 A
(MCB)
l SOU: 1x16 A
(MCB)
l Transmission
cabinet (TMC):
1x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x15 A
(FUSE(3))
l BBU: 2x15 A
(FUSE)
l Thermoelectric
cooling unit
(TEC)(4): 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l Transmission
equipment (TM)
(5): 4x15 A
(FUSE)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

303
DBS3900

NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker

(2) BAT: storage battery
(3) FUSE: fuse
(4) TM: transmission equipment
Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) in
circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply
scenarios.
Figure 5-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the
220 V AC single-phase power supply
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

304
DBS3900
Figure 5-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) when the DBS3900 uses the
110 V AC dual-live power supply
Table 5-27 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) when the
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers of
the EPS
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
3x20 A (MCB)
l Heater and SOU:

1x15 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1x160 A
(MCB)
1x63 A (MCB)
l Heater: 1x15 A
(MCB)
l SOU: 1x15 A
(MCB)
l RRU: 6x25 A
(MCB)
l TMC: 1x30 A
(MCB)
l FAN: 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l BBU: 2x25 A
(FUSE)
l TEC: 1x15 A
(FUSE)
l TM: 4x15 A
(FUSE)
When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission
equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution
box, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

305
DBS3900
Figure 5-11 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-28 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
Table 5-28 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
Cabinet Type

Breakers
l TM: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)

l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB)
When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission
equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution
box, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

306
DBS3900
the AC power supply
Table 5-29 lists the specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the
Table 5-29 Specifications of circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900
Cabinet Type

Breakers
l TM: 2x6 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB)+2x25

A (MCB)
l TM/BBU: 2x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B), and
the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with a heat exchanger
Figure 5-13 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 5-30 lists
the specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

307
DBS3900
Figure 5-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-30 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type

Breakers
TMC11H (Ver.B)
l RRU0 to RRU5: 6x20 A (MCB)

l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C), and
the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) can provide DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly.
Figure 5-14 shows the power distribution schemes for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 5-31 lists
the specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

308
DBS3900
Figure 5-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-31 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type

Breakers
TMC11H (Ver.C)

l BBU: 2x25 A (MCB)
l TM: 1x25 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Principles in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the DBS3900 is supplied with +24 V DC power, the +24 V DC power is converted to -48
V DC power by the DC/DC power system in the APM30H (Ver.B) and forwarded to the
DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B provides power supply for the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly,
transmission equipment, and other components.
Figure 5-15 shows the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 5-32 lists
the specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

309
DBS3900
Figure 5-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-32 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type

Breakers
APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)

l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or -48 V
DC power supply scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D).

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the AC power is converted into DC power by the
embedded power subrack unit (EPU, which is EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05) and distributed to
The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs:
l
One output provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU).
One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC
power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

310
DBS3900
The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery
cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other
equipment.
NOTE
The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC singlephase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting
bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.
Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.D) in
circuit breakers and fuses in the or APM30H (Ver.D) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power
supply scenarios.
Figure 5-16 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 220 V AC singlephase power supply
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

311
DBS3900
Figure 5-17 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses 110 V AC dual-live
power supply
Table 5-33 Specifications of circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) that uses AC
power supply
Power Supply
Specifications of
Upper-Level
Circuit Breakers of
the EPU
Specifications of
AC Output Circuit
Breakers
Specifications of
DC Output Circuit
Breakers and
Fuses
2x40 A+1x25 A
Heater and SOU:

1x16 A (MCB)
l BAT: 1x125 A/
2P (MCB)
1x100 A
Heater: 1x16 A
(MCB)
SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)
l RFC: 1x125 A
(MCB)
l RRU 0 to RRU 5:
6x30 A (FUSE)
l BBU: 2x30 A
(FUSE)
l FAN: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
l TM: 4x30 A
(FUSE)
l TMC: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
l IBBS: 1x30 A
(FUSE)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

312
DBS3900

NOTE
When a site is configured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU. In
this case, the RFC1 terminal on the EPU feeds external DC power into the DCDU-12B, which provides
power inputs for the RRUs, as shown in Figure 5-19.
When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the
transmission cabinet. The DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides power
supply for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet, as
the AC power supply
Table 5-34 lists the specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses
the AC power supply
Table 5-34 Specifications of fuses in the transmission cabinet when the DBS3900 uses the AC
power supply
Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Fuses
TMC11H (Ver.D) serving as a transmission

cabinet
l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE)

l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)
l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

When the DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, its BBU can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D), and
the DCDU-12B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) provides DC power to the BBU, RRUs, and fan
assembly.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

313
DBS3900
Figure 5-19 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 5-35 lists
the specifications of fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D).
Figure 5-19 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario
Table 5-35 Specifications of circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.D) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario
Cabinet Type
Specifications of DC Output Fuses
TMC11H (Ver.D)
serving as a power
cabinet
l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE)

l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE)
l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE)
5.2.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB

(Ver.C)
This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or -48 V
DC power supply scenario where the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an OMB or OMB
(Ver.C).

When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power
by the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to other components in the cabinet.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

314
DBS3900
Figure 5-20 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB when the 220 V AC singlephase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-36 lists the specifications of the
circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-20 Power distribution principles for the OMB in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC power
supply scenario
Table 5-36 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station
Power Supply
and Fuses
OMB
220 V AC single-phase or
l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A

l RRU: 1x12 A
l TM: 1x4 A
Figure 5-21 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) when the 220 V AC
single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power is supplied. Table 5-37 lists the specifications
of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-21
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

315
DBS3900
Power Supply
and Fuses
OMB (Ver.C)
l BBU: 1x30 A (FUSE(1))

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 630 A
(FUSE)
NOTE
(1) FUSE: fuse

When the -48 V DC power is supplied, the DCDU feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and other
Figure 5-22 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC power supply
scenario. Table 5-38 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-22 Power Distribution Principles for the OMB in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

316
DBS3900
Power Supply
and Fuses
OMB
-48 V DC
l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A

(MCB)
l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
l Transmission equipment:
1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
Figure 5-23 shows the power distribution principles for the OMB (Ver.C) in the -48 V DC power
supply scenario. Table 5-39 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base
station.
Figure 5-23
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

317
DBS3900
Power Supply
and Fuses
OMB (Ver.C)
-48 V DC
l BBU: 1x30 A (FUSE)

(FUSE)
5.2.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06,

19-inch Rack or Wall
This section describes the power distribution principles in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC,
or +24 V DC power supply scenario when the BBU in a DBS3900 is installed in an IMB03/
IFS06/19-inch rack or on a wall.

When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power
by the AC/DC power equipment and distributed to other components in the cabinet.
Figure 5-24 shows the power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC singlephase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario. Table 5-40 lists the specifications of
the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-24 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the 220 V AC or 110 V AC power
supply scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

318
DBS3900
Power Supply
and Fuses
IMB03
l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A

l RRU: 1x12 A
l TM: 1x4 A

When the -48 V DC power is supplied, the DCDU-03B feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and
other components in the cabinet.
Figure 5-25 shows the power distribution principles in the -48 V DC power supply scenario
when the BBU is installed in an IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, or 19-inch rack, or on a wall. Table
5-41 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.
Figure 5-25 Power Distribution Principles in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

319
DBS3900
Power Supply
and Fuses
IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, wall,

and 19-inch rack
-48 V DC

(MCB)
l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)
Power Distribution Principles in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When the +24 V DC power is supplied and the BBU is installed in the IMB03+IFS06, the +24
V DC power is converted into -48 V DC power by the DC/DC power equipment in the IMB03
and forwarded to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B feeds power to the BBU, RRUs, and other
Figure 5-26 shows the power distribution principles for the IMB03. Table 5-42 lists the
specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03.
Figure 5-26 Power distribution principles for the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

320
DBS3900
Table 5-42 Specifications of circuit breakers in the IMB03 in the +24 V DC power supply
scenario
Power Supply
IMB03+IFS06
+24 V DC

(MCB)
l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB)
1x12 A (MCB)
l FAN: 1x12A (MCB)
5.2.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A

Cabinet
This section describes the power distribution schemes for the DBS3900 using the TP48600A
cabinet in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios.
When the TP48600A cabinet uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the AC power
supply is distributed by the PDU05A-03 and converted into DC power by the ETP. The
DCDU-11C and DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B distribute the DC power to the BBU, RRU,
transmission equipment, and other components. PDU is short for power distribution unit, ETP
is short for embedded telecommunication power, DCDU is short for direct current distribution
unit, BBU is short for baseband unit, and RRU is short for remote radio unit.
After going through the PDU05A-03, an AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs.
l
One AC power output is connected to the junction box on the right of the cabinet door, and
divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.
Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs into DC
power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B, and
storage batteries.
One AC power output is provided for the SOU.
Figure 5-27 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied
and the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 5-28 shows the power distribution scheme when 220 V AC
three-phase power is supplied and the DCDU-03B is used. Table 5-43 lists the specifications
of circuit breakers.
The power distribution scheme for the cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V
AC dual-live-wire input power is the same as the power distribution scheme for the cabinet
supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The difference among the power distribution
schemes for the three types of power inputs lies in the configuration of the short-circuiting bars,
as shown in Figure 5-29.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

321
DBS3900
Figure 5-27 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
(DCDU-11B)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

322
DBS3900
Figure 5-28 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power
(DCDU-03B)
Table 5-43 Circuit breaker specification

Power Distribution
Equipment
Specifications of AC
PDU05A-03
l PSU1/5: 1x40 A
l PSU2/6: 1x40 A
l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A
l HEATER: 1x25 A
l SOU: 1x10 A
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

323
DBS3900
Power Distribution
Equipment
Specifications of AC
ETP
l DCDU-11C: LOAD0
(1x100 A)
l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B:
LOAD3 (1x200 A) and
LOAD5 (1x200 A)
l TMC11H (Ver.C):
LOAD1 and LOAD2
(1x100 A)
l Storage batteries:
LOAD6 (1x400 A)
l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200
A)
DCDU-11C
l Cabinet control unit

(CCU): LOAD0 (1x6 A)
l Central monitoring unit
type F (CMUF): LOAD1
(1x6 A)
l Transmission equipment
(TM)(1): LOAD2 (1x12
A)
l Environment monitoring
unit type A (EMUA)/TM:
LOAD3 (1x12 A)
l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7
(4x25 A)
l Environment monitoring
unit type F (CMUF):
LOAD8 (1x25 A)
l IBBS: LOAD9 (1x25 A)
DCDU-11B
l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5

(6x25 A)
l SPARE: LOAD6 to
LOAD9 (4x25 A)
DCDU-03B
l RRU: LOAD0 to LOAD5

(6x20 A)
l SPARE: LOAD6 to
LOAD8 (3x12 A)
NOTE
(1) TM: transmission equipment
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

324
DBS3900
Figure 5-29 Configuration of short-circuiting bars
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

325
DBS3900
DBS3900 Monitoring System
About This Chapter

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the
cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and
UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to
achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.
6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect
alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU
through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards
collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals
to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D)
The APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from
components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on
the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)
The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoring
boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and report the
alarms to the BBU.
6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03 or IFS06
The IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The
monitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and
report the alarms to the BBU. IMB is short for indoor mini box, IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support, and BBU is short for baseband unit.
6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet
The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarms
from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the
RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

326
DBS3900

When an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

327
DBS3900
6.1 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or

APM30H (Ver.A) Cabinet
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect
alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU
through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
NOTE
The BBU in a DBS3900 can be installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet in a single- or dualmode scenario.
Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply

Scenario
Figure 6-1 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30+1
TMC+1 BBC or with additional 1 APM30+1 BBC when the BBU is installed in the APM30.
NOTE
The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description
about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured
only in the APM30.
Figure 6-1 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30
APM30
APM30
APMI
APMI
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
ALM0/ALM1
MON0 / MON1
AFMU
PMU
APM30
APMI
AFMU
PMU
AFMU
PMU
TX RX
RS232/RS422
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
source to destination
TMC
Door Status
Sensor
BBU
BBC
Door Status
Sensor
APMI
Wiring terminal
for the surge
protection alarm
signal cable on
the DCDU
BBU
TMC
BBC
Door Status
Sensor
APMI
AFMU
Wiring terminal
for the surge
protection alarm
signal cable on
the DCDU
BBC
Door Status
Sensor
AFMU
Door Status
Sensor
Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/
IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet. The devices monitored by the
HEUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

328
DBS3900
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is
configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.A)
BAT
APM30H(Ver.A)
APM30H(Ver.A)
APM30H(Ver.A)
COM
COM_OUT / COM2
HPMI
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1
PMU
PMU
HEUA
HPMI
HEUA
PMU
HEUA
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
RS232/RS422
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
TMC11H(Ver.A)
HEUA
BBU
BBU
BBC/IBBS
Door status
sensor
TMC11H(Ver.A)
HEUA
BBC/IBBS
Door status
sensor
BBC/IBBS
Door status
sensor
Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 6-3 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs or
TMC11Hs(Ver.A) when the BBU is installed in a TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A).
l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC or
TMC11H (Ver.A)
TMC/TMC11H
TMC/TMC11H
COM_IN / COM1
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
APMI/HEUA/CMUA
BBU
6.2 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H

(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Cabinet
The APM30 (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards
collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals
to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
Cabinet Monitoring Principles of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). When the base station is configured with two
APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), the BBU is installed in the main APM30H (Ver.B)
or APM30H (Ver.C), which is located to the left of another APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H
(Ver.C).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

329
DBS3900

NOTE
The CUMUA is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B), and the CMUE is installed in the APM30H (Ver.C).
The APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) use the same monitoring scheme. The devices monitored by
the CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the
boards.
l
For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.
For details about the functions of the ports on the CMUE, see CMUE.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured
only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power
Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS or with additional
1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Figure 6-4 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
HPMI
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
COM_485
PMU
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
MON0 / MON1
CMUA/CMUE
HPMI
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
TO PMU DB50
COM
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C)
CMUA/CMUE
BBU
BBU
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
(Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs or with additional
1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

330
DBS3900
Figure 6-5 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
HPMI
COM_IN / COM1
COM_OUT / COM2
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
HPMI
CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
PMU
CMUA/CMUE
COM_485
MON0 / MON1
TO PMU DB50
COM
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
BBU
BBU
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
IBBS
CMUA/CMUE
Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered
and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in the outdoor scenario.
Figure 6-6 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and
monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring scheme when two the BBU is configured in one of the two
TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) configured for the DBS3900.
Figure 6-7 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.B)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

331
DBS3900
Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 6-8 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
(Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario
COM_IN
APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)
ALM
PRESENT
CMUA
MON0 / MON1
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
Power System
(DC/DC)
BBU
Monitoring Scheme for a Triple-Mode Base Station

NOTE
BBU0 is the main or root BBU, and BBU1 is the extension or leaf BBU.
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU0 is installed in the main APM30H
(Ver.B) or main APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. BBU1 is installed in the extension APM30H
(Ver.B) or extension APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. In a triple-mode base station, all monitoring
devices are connected to BBU0. The monitoring scheme for a triple-mode base station is the
same as a single- or dual-mode base station, as shown in Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10, and Figure
6-11.
Figure 6-9 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/
APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBSs
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

332
DBS3900
Figure 6-10 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)/
APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBSs
Figure 6-11 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBUs are installed in the TMC11Hs
(Ver.B)/TMC11Hs (Ver.C)
6.3 Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H

(Ver.D)
The APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from
components such as sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on
the BBU through the RS485 serial bus.
Cabinet Monitoring Scheme for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

the APM30H (Ver.D).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

333
DBS3900

NOTE
The devices monitored by the CMUEA, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see
the description about the boards.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUEA, see Central Monitoring Unit Type
EA (CMUEA).
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU.
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in the
APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Figure 6-12 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in the
TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

334
DBS3900
The following figure illustrates the monitoring scheme for the base station configured with of 1
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T when the BBU is installed in the
NOTE
The monitoring board in an IBBS700D cabinet is the CMUEA and the monitoring board in an IBBS700T
cabinet is the CMUF.
Figure 6-14 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T
Figure 6-15 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are
powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D) that is supplied with 220 V AC power.
Figure 6-15 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when only the RRUs are powered and
monitored by the APM30H (Ver.D)
Figure 6-16 illustrates the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs
(Ver.D) when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) that is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

335
DBS3900
Figure 6-16 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a TMC11H
(Ver.D)

NOTE
BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.
When the 220 V AC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station can
be installed in one APM30H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. All
monitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with a
transmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the APM30H (Ver.D) or in the
transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme. Figure 6-17 and Figure
6-18 show the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.
IBBS200D/T (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

336
DBS3900
IBBS200Ds/Ts (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
When the -48 V DC external power supply is used, both BBUs in a triple-mode base station can
be installed in one TMC11H (Ver.D). BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0. All
monitoring devices are connected to BBU 0. When the base station is also configured with a
transmission cabinet, BBU 1 can be installed either in the TMC11H (Ver.D) that serves as a
power cabinet or in the transmission cabinet. The two cases use the same monitoring scheme.
Figure 6-19 shows the monitoring scheme when BBU 1 is installed in the transmission cabinet.
Figure 6-19 Monitoring scheme for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
6.4 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or

OMB (Ver.C)
The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The monitoring
boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and report the
alarms to the BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

337
DBS3900
Cabinet Monitoring Principles for a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

NOTE
The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about each board or module.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUB, see HEUB.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the OMB, see AC/DC Power
Equipment.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU 11A in the OMB (Ver.C), see PMU
11A.
Figure 6-20 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB in the
110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-21 shows the monitoring
principles for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-20 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an AC
OMB
Figure 6-21 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DC
OMB
Figure 6-22 shows the monitoring principles when the BBU is installed in the OMB (Ver.C)
in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-23 shows the monitoring
principles for the cabinet using the -48 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-22 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an AC
OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

338
DBS3900
Figure 6-23 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a DC
OMB (Ver.C)
6.5 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the IMB03

or IFS06
The IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 cabinet is monitored by various boards or modules. The
monitoring boards or modules collect alarms from components such as sensors and fans, and
report the alarms to the BBU. IMB is short for indoor mini box, IFS is short for indoor floor
installation support, and BBU is short for baseband unit.

NOTE
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU on the AC/DC power equipment in the
IMB03, see AC/DC Power Equipment.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU in the AC/DC power system in the
IMB03, see PMU.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).
NOTE
The equipment monitored by the boards or modules is not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about each board or module.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the DC/DC power system, see Power Subrack
(DC/DC).

Figure 6-24 shows the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 applying the indoor solution of
BBU+RRU+IMB03 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the BBU
is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely outside the IMB03.
Figure 6-24 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110 V/220 V)
scenario
IMB03
RS485
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
BBU
PMU
Monitoring from
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

339
DBS3900
Figure 6-25 illustrates the monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU
+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 using the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. In this solution, the
BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed on the IFS06. Figure 6-26 shows the
monitoring principles for the cabinet using the +24 V DC power supply.
Figure 6-25 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (110 V/
220 V) scenario
IMB03
COM_IN / COM1
MON0 / MON1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
BBU
IMB03
PMU
Figure 6-26 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 (+24 V)
scenario
IMB03
ALM
PRESENT
EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1
Cable to be
connected on site
Cable connected
before delivery
Monitoring from
BBU
IMB03
Power System
(DC/DC)
Monitoring Principles for a Triple-Mode Base Station

NOTE
l The indoor solution of BBU+RRU+IMB03 does not support the triple-mode scenario. The solution of
BBU+RRU+IMB03+IFS06 supports the triple-mode scenario.
l BBU 0 is the primary or root BBU, and BBU 1 is the secondary or leaf BBU.
When the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR is used in the triple-mode scenario, two BBUs
need to be configured: BBU 0 and BBU 1. BBU 0 is installed in No.0 IMB03. It monitors No.
0 IMB03 and No.1 IMB03. BBU 1 is installed in No.3 IMB03. It monitors No.2 IMB03 and No.
3 IMB03. For details, see Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-27 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110 V/220 V)
scenario
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

340
DBS3900
Figure 6-28 Monitoring principles for the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (-48 V) scenario
6.6 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the

TP48600A Cabinet
The TP48600A cabinet is monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU. The boards collect alarms
from sensors and fans, and transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the
RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.
Cabinet Monitoring Schemes of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station

A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is
installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-29 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900
configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-30 shows the monitoring scheme
for the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
NOTE
The devices monitored by the CCU, CMUF, and PMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the
description about the boards. For monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.7 Customized Alarm Input.
l For the functions of the ports on the CMUF, see CMUF.
l For the functions of the ports on the PMU, see PMU.
l For the functions of the ports on the CCU, see CCU.
l For the positions of the CCU, CMUF, and PMU in different cabinets, see Configurations of Cabinets
Used by the DBS3900.
l When a BBU is configured with a UPEU and a UEIU or two UPEUs, the CCU can only be connected
to the MON0 port on one of the boards, the MON0 port on the other board must not be used, and the
MON1 ports cannot be connected to the CCU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

341
DBS3900
Figure 6-29 Monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1
TMC11H (Ver.C)
TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T
NOTE
If a device is not configured at a site, the monitoring signal cable is directly connected to the lower-level
device. For example, if the HAU0 and HAU1 shown in Figure 6-29 are not configured, the monitoring
signal cable can directly connect the RS485 port on the EMUA to the CCU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

342
DBS3900

Two BBUs are configured in a triple-mode base station, and the two BBUs are installed in the
TP48600A cabinet. Figure 6-31 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900 configured with
1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-32 shows the monitoring scheme for the DBS3900
configured with 1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T.
NOTE
In this document, BBU0 and BBU1 are used to exemplify two triple-mode BBUs.
l In a base station to be expanded, BBU0 is installed during initial site construction, and BBU1 is installed
during capacity expansion.
l In a new base station, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 works in LTEonly or UMTS-only mode.
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

343
DBS3900
TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When an alarm is generated by the customer equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:
l
The alarms are collected by the UPEU/UEIU in the BBU. UPEU is short for universal
power and environment interface unit, and UEIU is short for universal environment
interface unit.
The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the
related initial configuration guide. EMUA is short for environment monitoring unit type
A.
Monitoring Board Configurations

Customer equipment monitored by the BBU must report customized alarms to the BBU.
According to the number of required customized alarm inputs, the DBS3900 needs to be
configured with different types of monitoring boards, as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
External Power
Input
Application
Scenario
Number of
Boolean Outputs
to Be Monitored
Monitoring Board
Configurations
-48 V DC/220 V AC
Indoor DBS3900
(DBS3900 of which
the BBU is installed
indoors)
None
UPEU
1 to 16 channels
UPEU+UEIU

344
DBS3900
External Power
Input
Application
Scenario
Outdoor DBS3900
(DBS3900 of which
the BBU is installed
outdoors)
Number of
Boolean Outputs
to Be Monitored
Monitoring Board
Configurations
17 to 32 channels
UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA
None
UPEU
1 to 16 channels
UPEU+UEIU
+(2xUSLP2+SLPU)
17 to 32 channels
UPEU+UEIU
+EMUA
NOTE
l If backup power is required by the BBU, two UPEUs are configured instead of UPEU+UEIU.
l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA.
l Two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 boards (USLP2s) and one signal lightning protection
unit (SLPU) are delivered together.
l The EMUA with sensors can be configured, if required, for the indoor DBS3900.
Using the UPEU/UEIU to collect customized alarms

Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A UPEU and a UEIU or
two UPEUs can be configured in a BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs. If 16 or fewer
customized alarm inputs are required, the UPEU/UEIU is used to collect the customized alarms.
When using this method, connect the equipment to be monitored to the SLPU for surge
protection, and connect the SLPU to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure
6-33.
Figure 6-33 Using the UPEU/UEIU to collect customized alarms
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU
and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU/UEIU by using BBU alarm cables.
Table 6-2 describes the mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 and the customized alarm
numbers.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

345
DBS3900
Table 6-2 Mapping between the pins of ports IN0 to IN3 on the USLP2 and the customized
alarm numbers
Pins of
the
Ports
IN0 to
IN3
USLP2 in the Upper Slot
USLP2 in the Lower Slot
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
4+
5+
0+
1+
12+
13+
8+
9+
4(GND)
5(GND)
0(GND)
1(GND)
12(GND)
13(GND)
8(GND)
9(GND)
6(GND)
7+
2(GND)
3+
14(GND)
15+
10(GND)
11+
6+
7(GND)
2+
3(GND)
14+
15(GND)
10+
11(GND)
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 3.3.5 USLP2. For details about pin assignment for
the wires of a BBU alarm cable, see 7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTE
The SLPU used as an alarm signal surge protection unit is configured with two USLP2s by default before
delivery. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot, and
the USLP2 in slot 2 of the SLPU is not used.
Using the EMUA to Collect Customized Alarms

Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. When the DBS3900
requires more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs, the EMUA can be used to collect customized alarms
in the following ways:
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the power monitoring unit
(PMU). Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the central monitoring unit type A (CMUA),
CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For details
about cable connections, see Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34 Using the EMUA to collect customized alarms (1)
RS-485
SENSOR
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

346
DBS3900
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU
reports the alarms to the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA, which transfers the alarms to the remote
radio unit (RRU) through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-35.
RRU
ALM
COM_OUT
COM_IN
COM_IN
COM_OUT
CMUA
PMU
EMUA
RS-485
SENSOR
When the DBS3900 uses the TP48600A, customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that
connects to the cabinet control unit (CCU). Then, the CCU transfers the alarms to the BBU
through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-36.
For the position of the alarm input port on the EMUA and cable connections between the EMUA
and sensors, see the EMUA User Guide.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

347
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
DBS3900 Cables
About This Chapter

This chapter describes the cable connections in the DBS3900 and BBU3900 cables in various
scenarios.
NOTE
l For the cables in DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30&BBC&TMC User Guide,
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T
(Ver.B) Product Description, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D&IBBS200T (Ver.C) Product
Description, TP48600A-H17B1 User Manual, and IBBS700D & IBBS700T User Manual.
l For the RRU cables, see the installation guide for the corresponding type of RRU.
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as well
as the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power
and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.
7.2 BBU3900 Cables
This section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900
cables.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

348
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
7.1 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables, as well
as the interconnection signal cables, for the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power
and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900.
7.1.1 Power Cable Connections

This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), which
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into 48 V DC power to provides power to customer
equipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced
power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
NOTE
The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dualmode scenario.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is configured with
one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). The
APM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC
power and provides power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC. Figure 7-1 shows the power cable
connections.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

349
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-1 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC
Table 7-1 lists the power cables.

Table 7-1 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet
P2 and P5
Power cables for the fan assembly
P3
P4
Input Power Cable of the APM30

Transmission Cabinet
P6
Power Cable for the Batteries
P7
Input Power Cable of the Heater
P8
Input Power Cable of the Heating Film
P9
RRU power cable
Figure 7-2 shows the power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which
converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU,
RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

350
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC
Table 7-2 lists the power cable connections.

Table 7-2 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cable of the APM30H Power

Cabinet
P2 and P5
P3
P4
Input Power Cable of the TMC11H
P6
Power Cable for the Batteries
P7
Input power cable for the heater in the battery

cabinet
P8
Input power cables for the heating film in the

battery cabinet
P9
RRU power cable
When a base station is configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T,

the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

351
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure
7-3 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T

Table 7-3 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1
TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input Power Cables for the APM30H
P2 and P5
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H
P3
P4
Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
P6
Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
P7
TEC input power cable
P8
RRU power cable

352
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is 48 V DC, a distributed base station uses two TMCs. The TMCs are
configured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), which provide power to
the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 7-4 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 7-4 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1

P2
P3
P4
RRU power cable
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) provide
power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 7-5 shows the power cable
connections.
Figure 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

353
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables

Table 7-5 Power cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1

P2
P3
P4
RRU power cable
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides
a series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H(Ver.C).
The power equipment converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides
power to customer equipment.

When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1
TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with an EPS, which
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the
BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.B). Figure 7-6 shows the power cable connections.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

354
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D

Table 7-6 Power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
Power cable for the junction box
P2 and P11
P3
P4
P5
Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P8
P9
Power Cable for the Heating Film in the

IBBS200D

355
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
When a single- or dual-mode base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1

TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with an EPU, which
BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 7-7 shows the power cable connections.
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D

APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power Cable for the Fan Assembly in the

APM30H
P2
Input Power Cable for the Junction Box
P3 and P4
Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D
P5
P6
RRU power cable
P7
P8

356
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P9
P10
P11

TMC11H
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T.
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T

APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P9
P2 and P10
P3

357
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P4
P5
Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P8
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T.
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

358
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200T
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1

APM30H
P2
P3
Power Cable for the AC Heater
P4
P5
RRU power cable
P6
P7
Power Cables for Storage Batteries
P8
Power Cables for the TEC
P9
P10

TMC11H
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

359
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables

APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
P2 and P12
P3
P5 and P13
P7
P8
RRU power cable
P9
Power cable for the heating film
P11
P4 and P14
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

360
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds

APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1

APM30H
P2 and P4
P3
Power Cable for the Heating Film
P5
P6
RRU power cable
P7
P9 and P13
P10
P11

TMC11H

361
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P8 and P12
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts.
APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts

APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ts
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P9
P2 and P11
P3
P5 and P12
Power Cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T
P7

362
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P8
RRU power cable
P10
P4 and P13
(Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts.
APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts

APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ts
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1

APM30H
P2 and P3
P4

363
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P5
RRU power cable
P6
P8 and P11
Power Cables for the TEC
P9
P10

TMC11H
P7 and P12
If the DBS3900 serves as a triple-mode base station, it needs to be configured with two BBUs:
BBU0 and BBU1. The power cable connections in the cabinet housing BBU0 are the same as
those in the cabinet housing BBU1. Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15 show the power cable
connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as
an example.
Figure 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

364
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-14 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10
P2 and P11
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P8
P9
Figure 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
P2
P2
P12
P11
P1
P1
P9
P9
P10
P7
P9
BBU0
P3
P7
P10
BBU1
P6
P3
P6
P4
P4
P5
P5
P13
P14
P13
P14
P8
P8

Table 7-15 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P10

365
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P2, P6, and P12
P3
P5 and P13
P7
P8
RRU power cable
P9
P11
P4 and P14

When two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.B) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-16 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dualmode base station

Table 7-16 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
P3

366
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P4
RRU power cable
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.C) provide power to the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-17 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dualmode base station

Table 7-17 Power cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2

TMC11H
P3
P4
RRU power cable
Power Cable Connections in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

If a single- or dual-mode base station uses an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V), the DC/DC power
equipment in the APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) converts the +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power
and forwards the power to the DCDU-03B, which then distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs,
and other components in the cabinet. Figure 7-18 shows the power cable connections.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

367
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a singleor dual-mode base station

Table 7-18 Power cable connections in an APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V) configured for a single- or
dual-mode base station
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Input power cable for the DC/DC power

equipment
P2
Input power cable for the DCDU-03B
P3
P4
RRU power cable

To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides
a series of power equipment, which is installed in the APM30H (Ver.D). The power equipment
converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to customer
equipment.

NOTE
When the BBU of a DBS3900 is configured in the APM30H (Ver.D) and the APM30H (Ver.D) is
configured with seven to twelve RRUs, a DCDU-12B must be installed below the BBU to provide power
for the RRUs. This section describes single- or dual-mode base stations configured with twelve RRUs as
examples.
When a single- or dual-mode base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-19 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

368
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)

Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
Input Power Cable for a Junction Box
P2 and P8
Power Cables for a Fan Assembly
P3
P4
Power Cables in a Battery Cabinet
P5
TEC Power Cables
P6
Input Power Cable for the APM30H
P7
RRU power cable
P9
Input Power Cable for a TMC11H
P10
Power Cable for a Heating Film
P12
DCDU-12B Input Power Cable
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides the power for the BBU, RRUs,
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

369
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D). Figure 7-20 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)

APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
TEC Power Cables
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9
P12
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which converts
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

370
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power for the BBU, RRUs,
TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.D). Figure 7-21 shows the power cable connections in
this scenario.

Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
Power Cables for the Fan in an IBBS200D
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9
P10
P12

371
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
The following figure shows the power cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with of 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D/T.
NOTE
This section uses describes the power cable connections in the IBBS700D. The power cable connections
in the IBBS700T are the same as those in the IBBS700D.
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
The following table describes the power cables.

Table 7-22 Power cables in a single- or dual-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
No.
Description
P1, P10, and P11
Power Cables for an AC Junction Box
P2 and P8
FAN 02D Power Cables
P3
P4
Power Cable for a Power Distribution Box
P5
Power Cables for the Temperature Control

System
P6
EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Power Cables

372
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
No.
Description
P7
RRU power cable
P9
DCDU-12C Power Cable
P12
DCDU-12B Power Cable
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), the APM30H (Ver.D) is configured with an EPU, which
BBU, RRUs, TMC11H (Ver.D), and IBBS200Ts (Ver.D). Figure 7-23 shows the power cable
connections in this scenario.
APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3

373
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
TEC Power Cables
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9
P12
Figure 7-24 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D),
BBU +1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-24.
Figure 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D
(Ver.D)

Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

374
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-24 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D
(Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9
P10
P12
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200T (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D),
BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-25.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

375
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-25 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with +1 APM30H
(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T
(Ver.D)

(Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T
(Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4
P5
TEC Power Cables
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9
P12

376
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D),
BBU +2 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in
Figure 7-26.
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds
(Ver.D)

(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds
(Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9

377
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P10
P12
1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D),
BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as
those in a base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure
7-27.
(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts
(Ver.D)

(Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts
(Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1 and P11
P2 and P8
P3

378
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
P4 and P13
P5 and P14
TEC Power Cables
P6
P7
RRU power cable
P9
P12

When one TMC11H (Ver.D) is configured for a single- or dual-mode base station, the
DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) provides power for the BBU, RRUs, or transmission
equipment. Figure 7-28 lists the power cable connections.
Figure 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dualmode base station

Table 7-28 Power cable connections in one TMC11H (Ver.D) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
RRU power cable

379
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below
BBU 0, and the BBU power cable connections are the same as those in a base station configured with one
TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 1 in Figure 7-29.
Figure 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or two
TMC11Hs (Ver.D)

Table 7-29 Power cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with one or two
TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
P2
P3
P4
RRU power cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C)

To use the 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power, the DBS3900 installed outdoors can be
configured with OMB or OMB (Ver.C). The OMB or OMB (Ver.C) can be configured with an
AC/DC power equipment or an embedded telecommunication power A1 (ETP48100-A1) to
convert the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power, which is supplied to the
components in the OMB or OMB (Ver.C).

Figure 7-30 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB configured for the DBS3900.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

380
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-30 Power cable connections for the AC OMB
Table 7-30 describes the power cable connections.

Table 7-30 Power cable connections for the AC OMB
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power cable for the inner air circulation fan
P2
HEUA power cable
P3
P4
Input power cable for the direct current

distribution unit (DCDU)
P5
Power cable for the outer air circulation fan
P6
Input power cable for the AC/DC power

equipment
P7
AC input power cable for the OMB
P8
RRU power cable
Figure 7-31 shows the power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C) configured for the
DBS3900.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

381
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)

Table 7-31 Power cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
HEUB Power Cable
P2
P3
ETP48100-A1 Power Cable
P4
PDU10D-01 Power Cable
P5
RRU power cable
P6
AC Input Power Cable
Power Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-32 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB configured for the DBS3900.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

382
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-32 Power cable connections for the DC OMB

Table 7-32 Power cable connections for the DC OMB
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
Power cable for the inner air circulation fan
P2
HEUA power cable
P3
Power cable for the outer air circulation fan
P4
P5
DC input power cable for the OMB
P6
RRU power cable
Figure 7-33 shows the power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C) configured for the
DBS3900.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

383
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-33 Power Cable Connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)

Table 7-33 Power cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
HEUB Power Cable
P2
P3
RRU power cable
P4
DC Input Power Cable
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A

The TP48600A cabinet can be configured with the PDU05A-3 and ETP to use the 110 V AC or
220 V AC power supply. The PDU05A-3 distributes AC power and the ETP distributes DC
power to components in the cabinet.
Figure 7-34 shows the power cable connections in the following scenario: The DBS3900 is
configured with 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H (Ver.C), and two BBUs are
installed in the TP48600A that uses the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply. The power cable
connections for an IBBS700T and the power cable connections for an IBBS700D are the same.
Therefore, this section describes only the power cable connections for an IBBS700D.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

384
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A, two BBU power cables are required.
Figure 7-34 Power cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1 TP48600A+1
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

Table 7-34 Power cable connections in a base station configured with 1 TP48600A+1
IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cable No.
Cable Description
P1
AC input power cable
P2 to P5
P6
P7
Power Cable for the Temperature Control

System in a Battery Cabinet
P8
Input power cable for storage batteries
P9
Input power cable for a junction box
P10 to P21
RRU power cable
7.1.2 Transmission Cable Connections

This section describes the transmission cable connections in the indoor and outdoor DBS3900
base stations in different modes.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

385
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Single-Mode Base Station

In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical
cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration Principles
l
In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
The E1/T1 cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UELP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the E1/T1 cable is led from the T2 port on the UELP.
The FE/GE cable is firstly connected to the T1 port on the UFLP of the SLPU. After the
surge protection, the FE/GE cable is led from the T2 port on the UFLP.
The FE/GE optical cable does not require surge protection, and therefore it is not connected
to the SLPU.
Table 7-35 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different modes.
Table 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
Trans
missio
n over
the E1
Cable
GSM
only
Scenario 1: The UTRP is not configured. The

transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on
the GTMU.
"1" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured. The transmission

cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU
and UTRP.
UMTS
only

cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP.
the WMPT or UMPT.
LTE
only
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is

connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.

"2" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"3" in Figure
7-35 shows the
cable
connections.
386
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
Trans
missio
n over
the FE
Cable
GSM
only
Scenario 1: The UTRPc is configured. The

transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE optical
port or electrical port on the UTRPc.
"4" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port on the GTMU.
transmission cable is connected to the FE/GE electrical
port on the GTMU.
UMTS
only

Scenario 2: The UTRP2 is configured. The
port on the UTRP2.
"5" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port on the UTRP9.
port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
LTE
only

port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
"6" in the
Figure 7-35
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Figure 7-35 shows the cable connections supported by each mode.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

387
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-35 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Single-Mode Base Station

In GSM only, UMTS only, or LTE only mode, use the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE cable, or optical
cable to transmit data. This section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Configuration principles
l
In LTE only mode, use preferentially the FE/GE optical cable to transmit data.
Table 7-36 describes the transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station in
different transmission modes.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

388
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-36 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station

Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
Trans
missio
n over
the E1
Cable
GSM
Only

the GTMU.
"1" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

cables are connected to the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU
and UTRP.
UMTS
Only

the WMPT or UMPT.
Trans
missio
n over
the FE
Cable
"2" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
LTE
Only
The UMPT is configured. The transmission cable is

connected to the E1/T1 port on the UMPT.
"3" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections.
GSM
Only

"4" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port on the GTMU.
port on the GTMU.
UMTS
Only

port on the UTRP2.
"5" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port on the UTRP9.
port or electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

389
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
LTE
Only

"6" in the
Figure 7-36
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port or electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT.

Figure 7-36 Transmission cable connections for a single-mode base station
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T2: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic

Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This
section describes transmission cable connections for each mode.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

390
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
l
In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
to the SLPU.
Table 7-37 describes the transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in different
transmission modes.
Table 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
TDM
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S

the GTMU.
"1" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
IP
Over
E1/T1
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S

the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port
or optical port.
"2" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using
the electrical port or optical port.

391
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
GSM
+LTE
The UTRP is configured. The transmission cable is

connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the
electrical port or optical port.
"3" in Figure
7-37 shows the
cable
connections.
UMTS
+LTE

or UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT
using the electrical port or optical port.
"4" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections.

"5" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
IP over GSM
FE/GE +UMT
Comm S
on
Trans
missio
n

port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to
the UTRP using the optical port.
port on the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port.
interconnected to the GTMU using the optical port.
port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU
through the backplane.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

392
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
GSM
+LTE

"6" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
port or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT
or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the
backplane.
UMTS
+LTE

interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using the
electrical port.
"7" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

optical port.
Route
GSM
Backu +UMT
p
S
Mode
with IP
Comm
on
Trans
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Scenario 1: The transmission cables are connected to

the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
GTMU using the optical port.
the optical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU using the electrical port.

"8" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
393
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
missio
n
GSM
+LTE

the electrical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU. The LMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the
"9" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

the optical ports on the LMPT or UMPT and the
UMTS
+LTE

WMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
optical port.
"10" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

optical port.
Hybrid
Trans
missio
n
UMTS
+LTE

LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
electrical port.
"11" in the
Figure 7-37
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or UMPT is
electrical port.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

394
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-37 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge

Protection Transfer Cable
T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T3: 7.2.8 Interconnection

Cable Between the FE
Electrical Ports
T4: 7.2.10 FE/GE

Fiber Optic Cable
T5: 7.2.9 Interconnection

Cable Between FE Optical
Ports
T6: 7.2.7 FE Surge

Protection Transfer
Cable
T7: FE/GE Ethernet Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in CoTransmission Mode

In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, common transmission can be used. This
l
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
In GSM+UMTS mode using TDM common transmission, the transmission cables are
connected to the GTMU or the UTRP on the GTMU.
395
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
In GSM+UMTS mode using IP common transmission, the transmission cables are

connected to the WMPT or UMPT, or the UTRP on the UMTS side.
In GSM+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT or
UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
In UMTS+LTE mode, the transmission cables are preferentially connected to the LMPT
or UMPT, or the UTRP on the LTE side.
transmission modes.
Table 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
TDM
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S

the GTMU.
"1" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
IP
Over
E1/T1
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S

the WMPT or UMPT. The WMPT or UMPT is
interconnected to the GTMU using the electrical port
or optical port.
"2" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

cable is connected to the E1/T1 port on the UTRP. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using
the electrical port or optical port.
GSM
+LTE

or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU using the
electrical port or optical port.
"3" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections.
UMTS
+LTE

using the electrical port or optical port.
"4" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections.

396
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
IP over GSM
FE/GE +UMT
Comm S
on
Trans
missio
n
Legend

"5" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

port on the UTRP2. The GTMU is interconnected to
the UTRP using the optical port.
port or optical port on the WMPT or UMPT. The
WMPT or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU
GSM
+LTE

"6" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

or UMPT is interconnected to the GTMU through the
backplane.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

397
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
UMTS
+LTE

"7" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

electrical port.
optical port.
Route
Backu
p
Mode
with IP
Comm
on
Trans
missio
n
GSM
+UMT
S

the electrical ports on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GSM
+LTE

"8" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"9" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

GTMU through the backplane.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

398
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
UMTS
+LTE

optical port.
"10" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

optical port.
Hybrid
Trans
missio
n
UMTS
+LTE

the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE
optical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or
UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using
the electrical port.
"11" in the
Figure 7-38
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

the E1/T1 port on the WMPT or UMPT and the FE/GE
electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT. The LMPT or
UMPT is interconnected to the WMPT or UMPT using
the optical port.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

399
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-38 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in common
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T2: 7.2.8 Interconnection Cable

Between the FE Electrical Ports
T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber

Optic Cable
T4: 7.2.9 Interconnection Cable

Between FE Optical Ports
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

400
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Dual-Mode Base Station in

Separate Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This
l
to the SLPU.
transmission modes.
Table 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent
transmission mode
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
GSM
E1/T1
+UMT
S E1/
T1
GSM
+UMT
S
The transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1

port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"1" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections.
GSM
FE/GE
+UMT
S FE/
GE
GSM
+UMT
S

the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
"2" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
GSM
+LTE

the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
transmission cables are connected to the E1/T1 port on
the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the
LMPT or UMPT.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side.
ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical
or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

"3" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
401
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
GSM
+LTE

the FE electrical port on the LMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
"4" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
UMTS
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
UMTS
+LTE

the FE optical port on the LMPT or UMPT and FE
electrical port on the GTMU.
the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical
port on the LMPT or UMPT.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS
side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1
port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
UMTS
+LTE

WMPT or UMPT.
electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.
"5" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"6" in the
Figure 7-39
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

402
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-39 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in independent
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge

T2: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber T4: 7.2.7 FE Surge
Optic Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Dual-Mode Base Station in Separate

Transmission Mode
In GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE, or UMTS+LTE mode, independent transmission can be used. This
transmission modes.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

403
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
GSM
E1/T1
+UMT
S E1/
T1
GU

port on the WMPT or UMPT and the GTMU.
"1" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections.
GSM
FE/GE
+UMT
S FE/
GE
GU

the FE optical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
"2" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
GSM
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
GL

the FE electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT and the
GTMU.
the GTMU and the FE optical or electrical port on the
LMPT or UMPT.
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the GSM side.
ports on the GTMU and UTRP and to the FE electrical
or optical port on the LMPT or UMPT.
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
GL
UMTS
E1/T1
+LTE
FE/GE
UL

GTMU.
electrical port on the GTMU.
the WMPT or UMPT and the FE optical or electrical
Scenario 2: The UTRP is configured on the UMTS
side. The transmission cable is connected to the E1/T1
port on the UTRP and to the FE electrical or optical
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

"3" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"4" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
"5" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.
404
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Trans
missi
on
Mode
Mode
Supp
orted
Legend
UMTS
FE/GE
+LTE
FE/GE
UL

WMPT or UMPT.
"6" in the
Figure 7-40
shows the cable
connections in
scenario 1.

electrical port on the WMPT or UMPT.

Figure 7-40 Transmission cable connections for a dual-mode base station in non-common
transmission mode
T1: 7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
T3: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Outdoor Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

405
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction,
and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion.
In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode,
and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-41 lists the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Table 7-41 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
Triple Mode
Mode Specification
Reference
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM

+UMTS mode and BBU1
works in LTE only mode.
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM+LTE

mode and BBU1 works in
UMTS only mode.
UO (BBU0) + GL (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in UMTS only

GSM+LTE mode.
GO (BBU0) + UL (BBU1)
(BBUs not cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM only

UMTS+LTE mode.
l In dual mode, common

and independent
transmission are
supported. For details, see
the Transmission Cable
Connections for a DualMode Base Station in
Common Transmission
Mode and the
Transmission Cable
Independent
Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a singlemode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a SingleMode Base Station.
GU (BBU0) + LO (BBU1)
(BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM

+UMTS mode and BBU1
For details, see the "1" or the

"2" in the Figure 7-41.
GL (BBU0) + UO (BBU1)
(BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM+LTE

UMTS only mode.
For details, see the "3" or the

"4" in the Figure 7-41.
GU (BBU0) + UL (BBU1)
(BBUs cascaded)
BBU0 works in GSM

+UMTS mode and BBU1
works in UMTS+LTE mode.
For details, see the "5" in the

Figure 7-41.
Figure 7-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

406
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-41 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1: 7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
Transmission Cable Connections in an Indoor Triple-Mode Base Station

This section describes the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL
+UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while
the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
Table 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Table 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Triple-Mode Scenario
Mode Specification
Reference
GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)

(BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM

+UMTS mode and BBU 1
l Dual-mode includes
common and noncommon transmission.

407
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Mode Specification
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)

(BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE

mode and BBU 1 works in
UMTS only mode.
UO (BBU 0)+GL (BBU 1)

(BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in UMTS only

GSM+LTE mode.
GO (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)

(BBU Not Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM only

UMTS+LTE mode.
Reference
For details, see the
Transmission Cable
Common Transmission
Mode and the
Transmission Cable
Non-Common
Transmission Mode.
l For details about the
transmission cable
connections for a singlemode base station, see the
Transmission Cable
Connections for a SingleMode Base Station.
GU (BBU 0)+LO (BBU 1)

(BBU Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM

For details, see the "1" or

"2" in the Figure 7-42
GL (BBU 0)+UO (BBU 1)

(BBU Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM+LTE

UMTS only mode.
For details, see the "3" or

"4" in the Figure 7-42
GU (BBU 0)+UL (BBU 1)

(BBU Cascaded)
BBU 0 works in GSM

works in UMTS+LTE mode.
For details, see the "5" in the

Figure 7-42
Figure 7-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

408
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-42 Transmission cable connections for a triple-mode base station
T1:7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable
7.1.3 CPRI Cable Connections

CPRI cable connections for the DBS3900 depend on the DBS3900 working mode.
NOTE
l Of all RRUs working in GSM mode, the RRU3008 or RRU3004 is used as an example to describe the
CPRI cable connections.
l Of all RRUs working in UMTS mode, the RRU3804 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cable
connections.
l Of all RRUs working in LTE mode, the RRU3201 is used as an example to describe the CPRI cable
connections.
l Of all RRUs working in multiple modes, the RRU3908 is used as an example to describe the CPRI
cable connections.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can
be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 7-43 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/
RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, six RRUs support three sectors, and a pair of two RRUs
working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

409
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-43 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 7-44 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3008s/
RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, nine RRUs support three sectors, and a group of three
RRUs working in the same sector with different bands are cascaded.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number of
sectors and frequency bands. UMTS is short for Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,
and CPRI is short for common public radio interface.
Figure 7-45 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The baseband unit
(BBU) is configured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and do not support
MIMO, and the base station supports three sectors. MIMO is short for multiple-input multipleoutput.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

410
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-46 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The BBU is
configured with the WBBPb, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and two
RRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.
configured with the WBBPd, each RRU3804 works in a single band and supports MIMO or
supports expanded bandwidth and carriers, the base station supports three sectors, and two
RRU3804s working in the same sector are cascaded.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

411
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
CPRI Cable Connections in the LO Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number of
sectors and frequency bands. LTE is short for Long Term Evolution, and CPRI is short for
common public radio interface.
NOTE
CPRI cables are connected to CPRI ports on the LBBP sequentially from the CPRI0 port.
configured with the LBBPd1, LBBPd2, or LBBPc, each RRU works in a single band and
supports 2T2R MIMO, and the base station uses 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth and supports
three sectors. BBU is short for baseband unit, RRU is short for remote radio unit, and MIMO is
short for multiple-input multiple-output.
configured with the LBBPd2 or LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

412
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
MIMO, each pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 10 MHz bandwidth and
supports three sectors.
configured with the LBBPc, each RRU works in single band and supports 4T4R MIMO, each
pair of RRUs serve one sector, and the base station uses 20 MHz bandwidth and supports three
sectors.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable
connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Figure 7-51 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band mode
and three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology support three sectors.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

413
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-52 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRU3804s work
in single-band mode, the RRU3804s working in star topology and each supports a sector; the
RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and
chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the
same sector with different bands are cascaded.
in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s working
in the same sector with different bands are cascaded; the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in dualband mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a
sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands
are cascaded.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

414
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors;
the RRU3008s/RRU3004s work in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working
in star topology correspond to three sectors.
CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector
and frequency band.
in single-band mode and support 2T2R MIMO, three RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

415
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s serving the same sector
with different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.
in dual-band mode, use 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and support 2T2R MIMO, all the
RRU3201s serve three sectors and use the star topology; the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode,
two RRU3008s serving the same sector with different bands are connected in the star and chain
topology.
in single-band mode, all the RRU3201s serve three sectors, use 10 MHz bandwidth, support
4T4R MIMO, and the RRU3201s serving the same sector are connected in the dual-star topology;
the RRU3008s work in dual-band mode, and two RRU3008s serving the same sector with
different bands are connected in the star and chain topology.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

416
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRU3908s serving the same
sector are connected in the dual-star topology; the RRU3008s work in single-band mode, three
RRU3008s serve three sectors and use the star topology.
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS+LTE Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS+LTE mode, CPRI cable connections depend on the number
of sectors and frequency bands supported by the DBS3900. LTE is short for Long Term
Evolution, and CPRI is short for common public radio interface.
As shown in Figure 7-59, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors,
support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in star
topology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors, are connected to
the BBU by CPRI cables in star topology, but do not support the 2T2R MIMO technology.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

417
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
As shown in Figure 7-60, the RRU3201s work in dual frequency bands, serve three sectors with
a bandwidth of 20 MHz or 15 MHz, support the 2T2R MIMO technology, and are connected to
the BBU by CPRI cables in star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single frequency band and
are connected to the BBU by CPRI cables in star-chain topology, and two RRU3804s serving
the same sector are cascaded.
As shown in Figure 7-61, the RRU3201s work in a single frequency band, serve three sectors
with a bandwidth of 10 MHz, support the 4T4R MIMO technology; two RRU3201s serving the
same sector are connected to the BBU in dual-star topology; the RRU3804s work in a single
frequency band and serve three sectors, and are connected to the BBU in star-chain topology,
with two RRU3804s serving the same sector cascaded.
Figure 7-62 shows the CPRI cable connections in the following situation: The RRUs use the
CPRI MUX topology, the UMTS mode is configured with the WBBPf, the LTE mode is
configured with the LBBPd, the RRU3929s (1700 MHz) are used as multi-mode RRUs, and all
CPRI cables are connected to the WBBPf; the LBBPd is not connected to any RRUs.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

418
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-62 CPRI cable connections in CPRI MUX topology
CPRI Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

Starting from SingleRAN7.0, Huawei triple-mode base stations support six typical scenarios:
GU+L (BBUs not interconnected), GL+U (BBUs not interconnected), U+GL (BBUs not
interconnected), GU+L (UCIU+UMPT), GL+U (UCIU+UMPT), and GU+UL (UCIU+UMPT).
A single BBU can support a maximum of two modes. Therefore, two BBUs are required for a
triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for
better understanding.
l
The difference between the GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and U+GL (BBUs
not interconnected) scenario is as follows: The GL+U (BBUs not interconnected) scenario
applies to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the U+GL (BBUs
not interconnected) scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
The difference between the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario and GU+L (UCIU
+UMPT) scenario is as follows: In the GU+L (BBUs not interconnected) scenario, a BBU
in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in the same base station but not interconnected.
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, a BBU in GU mode and a BBU in LO mode are in
the same base station are interconnected through the UCIU.
GU+L (BBUs not Interconnected)

In the GU+L scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
In the GU+L scenario, BBU1 works in LTE only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the LO
Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
GL+U (BBUs not Interconnected)

In the GL+U scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the GL
Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

419
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
In the GL+U scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
U+GL (BBUs not Interconnected)

In the U+GL scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS only mode. CPRI Cable Connections in the
UMTS Only Base Station shows the CPRI cable connections in this scenario.
In this scenario, CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station describes the CPRI cable
connections for BBU1 working in GSM+LTE mode.
GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)
In the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario, BBU0 and BBU1 are interconnected by the UCIU and
UMPT to support the GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes. Figure 7-63 shows the CPRI cable
connections in this scenario.
Figure 7-63 CPRI cable connections in the GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) scenario
7.1.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Scenario Where the BBU Is Installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V
AC/220 V AC and 48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

420
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply

Scenario
NOTE
The BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) only in a single-mode or dualmode scenario.
Figure 7-64 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 configured with
1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenario.
Figure 7-64 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
+1 TMC+1 BBC
Table 7-43 lists the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 7-43 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 1 APM30H
+1 TMC+1 BBC
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment Monitoring Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU
S3
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S4 and S5
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status

Sensor

421
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S6
Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the

Batteries
S7
Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30

Figure 7-65 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 configured with 1
APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC.
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC

(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBC
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
Environment monitoring signal cable
S2
S3, S7
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
422
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S4

Batteries
S5 and S6

Sensor
APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T.
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T

(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3, S7

Cable
423
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S4
IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable
S5 and S6

Sensor
APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs.
Figure 7-67 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs

Table 7-46 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 BBCs
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3, S7, and S8

Cable

424
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S4

Batteries
S5 and S6

Sensor
APM30Hs (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts.
Figure 7-68 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts

Table 7-47 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with 2 APM30Hs
(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+2 IBBS200Ts
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2
S3, S7, and S8

Cable
S4
IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable
S5 and S6

Sensor

425
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 7-69 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured with
two TMCs in the 48 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 7-48 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMCs
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
Figure 7-70 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured
with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).
Figure 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver.A)

Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

426
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-49 Monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured with two TMC11Hs
(Ver.A)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2

Cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H

(Ver.C) Cabinet
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V
AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Scenario
Figure 7-71 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in the DBS3900 that serves as a
single- or dual-mode base station and is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H
(Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
Figure 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Table 7-50 lists the monitoring signal cables.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

427
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-50 Monitoring signal cables in a single- or dual-mode base station in the configuration
of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
S3 and S5
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between

the CMUA and the BBU
Figure 7-72 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

428
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE

and the BBU
configuration of one APM30H (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

of +1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4

429
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S3 and S5

S6
Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded

CMUAs
configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
configuration of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

of +1 APM30H (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4

430
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable No.
Cable Description
S3 and S5

and the BBU
S6

CMUAs
configuration of two APM30Hs (Ver. B)+one TMC11H (Ver. B)+four IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
S1
S2 S3
S1
S1
S2
S6
S1
S5
S6 S4
S6 S4

of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5

S6

CMUAs
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

431
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.C)+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5

and the BBU
S6

CMUAs
A triple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs: BBU0 and BBU1. BBU0 is configured
in the basic cabinet, and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. The monitoring devices
in all cabinets are connected to BBU0. Figure 7-77 shows the monitoring signal cable
connections in a triple-mode base station, using the scenario of BBUs in APM30Hs (Ver.B) as
an example.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

432
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-77 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station in the
configuration of 2 APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

Table 7-56 Monitoring signal cables in a triple-mode base station in the configuration of 2
APM30Hs (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+4 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
S2 and S4
S3 and S5

S6

CMUAs

Figure 7-78 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 serves as a
single- or dual-mode base station and the BBUs are installed in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B).
Figure 7-78 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two
TMC11Hs (Ver. B)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

433
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables

Table 7-57 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2

Figure 7-79 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBUs of the DBS3900
are configured in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C).
Figure 7-79 Monitoring signal cable connections in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a
single- or dual-mode base station

Table 7-58 Monitoring signal cables in two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) configured for a single- or dualmode base station
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2

and the BBU

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for distributed base stations in the 110 V
AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

434
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables

Scenario
Figure 7-80 shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).
Figure 7-80 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)

Table 7-59 Monitoring signal cable connections in a single- or dual-mode base station
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
PMU-CMUEA Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S3
7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

435
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)

configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

436
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)

configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable
S5

CMUEAs
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

437
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)

configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable
S5

CMUEAs
The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

438
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700D
No.
Description
S1 and S4
PMU 11A-CMUEA Monitoring Signal

Cable
S2 and S3
CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
The following figure shows the monitoring signal cable connections in a base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

439
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS700T
No.
Description
S1
PMU 11A-CMUEA Monitoring Signal

Cable
S4
PMU-CCU Monitoring Signal Cable
S2 and S3
CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable
In a triple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base
station is not configured with a TMC11H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space below
BBU 0 in the primary APM30H (Ver.D). If this base station is configured with a TMC11H
(Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D). Figure 7-86 shows the monitoring signal
cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1
IBBS200D (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200D (Ver.D).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

440
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-86 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
IBBS200D (Ver.D)

Table 7-63 Monitoring signal cable connections in a triple-mode base station configured with
IBBS200D (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable
IBBS200T (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+1 IBBS200T (Ver.D)
and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base
station is the same as those in the same base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as
shown by 2 in Figure 7-87.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

441
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
IBBS200T (Ver.D)

IBBS200T (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable
Figure 7-88 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

442
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)

IBBS200Ds (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable

443
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-89 shows the monitoring signal connections in a triple-mode base station configured
with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D) or 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)
+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.D)+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)+2 IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

444
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
IBBS200Ts (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S4
S2 and S3

Cable

configured with one TMC11H (Ver.D).
configured with one TMC11H (Ver.D)

configured with one TMC11H (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1

Cable
configured with one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D).
NOTE
When the base station is configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.D) and BBU 1 is installed in the 1 U space
below BBU 0, the monitoring signal cable connections in the base station is the same as those in the same
base station where BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D), as shown by 2 in Figure 7-81.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

445
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
one or two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)

two TMC11Hs (Ver.D)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2

Cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IMB03, or
IFS06
The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base stations in 110 V
AC/220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenario.
NOTE
l For details about the monitoring signal cable connections when the BBU is installed in the IMB03 or
IMB03+IFS06, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.
l When the DBS3900 uses the OMB or IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a single- or dualmode base station. When the DBS3900 uses the IMB03+IFS06, the DBS3900 can be configured as a
single-, dual-, or triple-mode base station.

Scenario
with an AC OMB.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

446
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-92 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB

S2
S2
S1
S4
S1
S2
S3
S3
S5
S5
S4
S2

Table 7-69 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1

Sensor
S2
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan
S3
Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
S4
Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge

Protection Box
S5
Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC

Power Equipment
with an AC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

447
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-93 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)

Table 7-70 Monitoring signal cable connections for the AC OMB (Ver.C)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
ELU Signal Cable
S2
Monitoring signal cable for the outer air

circulation fan
S3
Monitoring signal cable for the inner air

circulation fan
S4

Sensor
S5
Monitoring Signal Cable for the Surge

Protection Box
S6
7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S7
PMU 11A Monitoring Signal Cable
S8
Temperature monitoring signal cable

448
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables

with a DC OMB.
Figure 7-94 DC OMB monitoring signal cable connections

Table 7-71 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1

Sensor
S2
S3
Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
with a DC OMB (Ver.C).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

449
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-95 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)

Table 7-72 Monitoring signal cable connections for the DC OMB (Ver.C)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1
ELU Signal Cable
S2

Assembly
S3

Assembly
S4

Sensor
S5
7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal

Cable
S6
Temperature monitoring signal cable
Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Using the TP48600A Cabinet

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 uses the
TP48600A cabinet.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

450
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
When the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1

TMC11H (Ver.C), two BBUs are installed in the TP48600A cabinet. Figure 7-96 shows the
monitoring signal cable connections in this scenario. The monitoring signal cable connections
in the scenario with one IBBS700T are the same as those for the scenario with one IBBS700D.
This section describes only the monitoring signal cable connections for the scenario with one
IBBS700D.
NOTE
If only one BBU is installed in the TP48600A cabinet, only one CCU-BBU signal cable is required.
Figure 7-96 Monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 in the configuration of 1
TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Table 7-73 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 7-73 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1
TP48600A+1 IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)
Cable No.
Cable Description
S1 and S2
Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CCU

and the BBU
S3
Monitoring Signal Cable for the TMC11H
S4
Inter-CCU Signal Cable
7.1.5 Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections

Two BBUs in a triple-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the mode supporting
capability, two BBUs in a single-mode base station can be cascaded to expand the service
processing capability of a single mode.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

451
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
When two BBUs in a base station are cascaded to achieve the GUL triple-mode, BBU0 is the root BBU,
and BBU1 is the leaf BBU.
UCIU+UMPT
In a triple-mode base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the UMPT in BBU1 to
achieve the GUL triple-mode. In a UMTS only base station, the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected
to the UMPT in BBU1 to expand the UMTS service processing capacity. Any port from M0 to
M4 on the UCIU in BBU0 can be connected to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU1, as shown
in Figure 7-97.
NOTE
In UCIU+UMPT mode, the UMPT must be configured as the main control board of BBU1. Table 7-74
lists the BBU configurations in UCIU+UMPT mode.
Table 7-74 BBU configurations

BBU0
BBU1
GU
GL
GU
UL
Single-Mode Scenario
Figure 7-97 Signal cable connection between the UCIU and the UMPT
WBBPf+WBBPf
In the UCIU+UMPT mode, the WBBPfs in the two BBUs can be connected to transmit baseband
data. As shown in Figure 7-97, the HEI ports on the WBBPfs in BBU0 and BBU1 are connected.
NOTE
In SRAN7.0, only the WBBPf in slot 2 or 3 of a BBU can be connected to the WBBPf in another BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

452
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-98 Signal cable connection between the WBBPfs
7.2 BBU3900 Cables

This section describes the exteriors, pin assignment for the wires, and connections of BBU3900
cables.
7.2.1 List of BBU3900 Cables

The BBU3900 cables consist of the PGND cables, BBU power cables, E1/T1 cables, E1/T1
surge protection transfer cables, FE/GE Ethernet cables, FE/GE surge protection transfer cables,
interconnection cables between FE electrical ports and between FE optical ports, CPRI fiber
optic cables, APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable, HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable,
CMUA-BBU monitoring signal cable, monitoring signal cables for the EMUA, monitoring
signal cables for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm
signal cable, GPS clock signal cable, BBU cascading signal cable, co-site signal cable, and
maintenance adapter cable.
Table 7-75 lists the BBU3900 cables.
Table 7-75 Cable list
Cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
7.2.2 PGND Cable
OT terminal
(M4, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
Ground
terminal on
the BBU
OT terminal
(M8, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
External
ground bar
7.2.3 BBU Power

Cable
3V3 connector
PWR port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
OT terminal
(M4, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
LOAD6 wiring
terminal on the
DCDU
3V3 connector
PWR port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
EPS/LOAD1

453
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable
DB26 male
connector
E1/T1 port on
the UELP in
the SLPU, or
E1/T1 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
Made onsite
according to
requirements
External
transmission
equipment
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge

Protection Transfer
Cable
DB26 male
connector
E1/T1 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU
DB25
connector
INSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU
FE/GE Ethernet
Cable
RJ45 connector
FE0 port in the

OUTSIDE
part of the
UFLP in the
SLPU
RJ45
connector
External
transmission
equipment
RJ45
connector
FE0 port in the

INSIDE part of
the UFLP in the
SLPU
FE0 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU or
WMPT in the
BBU
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in
the BBU
FE/GE port on
the LMPT in
the BBU
7.2.7 FE Surge
Protection Transfer
Cable
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on
the UMPT,
GTMU or
WMPT in the
BBU
FE/GE port on
the UTRP in
the BBU
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

454
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
7.2.8
Interconnection
Cable Between the
FE Electrical Ports
RJ45 connector
FE0 port on
the WMPT in
the BBU
RJ45
connector
FE0 port on the

GTMU in the
BBU
7.2.9
Interconnection
Cable Between FE
Optical Ports
LC connector
FE1 port on
the WMPT in
the BBU
LC connector
FE1 port on the

GTMU in the
BBU
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber

Optic Cable
LC connector
FE1 port on
the WMPT or
GTMU in the
BBU
FC, SC, or LC
connector
External
transmission
equipment
7.2.11 CPRI Fiber

Optic Cable
DLC connector
CPRI port on
the GTMU or
WBBP in the
BBU
DLC
connector
CPRI_W port
on the RRU
7.2.12 APMI-BBU
Monitoring Signal
Cable
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on
the UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
Twisted pair
TX+, TX-, RX
+, or RX- port
on the APMI
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU
Monitoring Signal
Cable
RJ45 connector
MON port on
the UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
COM_IN port
on the HEUA
7.2.15 Monitoring
Signal Cable
Between the CMUA
and the BBU
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on
the UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
CMUA/
COM_IN
7.2.17 Monitoring
Signal Cable for the
EMUA
RJ45 connector
MON1 port on
the UPEU in
the BBU
DB9 male
connector
RS485 port on
the EMUA
7.2.18 Monitoring
PSU (DC/DC)
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM0
port on the
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
Cord end
terminal
ALM wiring
terminal on the
PSU (DC/DC)

455
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
One End
The Other End
Connector
Installation
Position
Connector
Installation
Position
7.2.19 In-Position
PSU (DC/DC)
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM1
port on the
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
PRESENT port
on the PSU
(DC/DC)
7.2.20 BBU Alarm

Cable
RJ45 connector
EXT_ALM
port on the
UPEU or
UEIU in the
BBU
RJ45
connector
External alarm
device
7.2.21 GPS Clock

Signal Cable
SMA male
connector
GPS port on
the LMPT or
USCU in the
BBU
N-type female
connector
GPS surge
protector
7.2.22 BBU
interconnection
signal cable
DLC connector
M0 to M4
ports on the
UCIU in the
BBU
DLC
connector
CI port on the
UMPT in the
BBU
7.2.23 Cable
Between two
Combined Base
Stations
DB15 male
connector
GCK port on
the UCIU in
the BBU
MD36 or
DB15 male
connector
DGLUb on the
DCTB in the
BTS3012
7.2.24 Adapter
Used for Local
Maintenance
USB connector
USB port on
the UMPT in
the BBU
Ethernet
connector
Ethernet cable
7.2.2 PGND Cable

A PGND cable ensures proper grounding of a BBU.
Exterior
A PGND cable is green and yellow and has a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.). Both
ends of the cable are OT terminals. If the customer prepares the PGND cable, a copper-core
cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in.2) is recommended.
Figure 7-99 shows a PGND cable.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

456
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-99 PGND cable for the BBU
(1) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.)
(1) OT terminal (M8, 6 mm2, or 0.0093 in.)

BBU power cable feeds power from the power equipment into the BBU. The maximum length
of the BBU power cable is 20 m.
Cable Type
Table 7-76 lists the mapping relationships between the power device for the BBU and the type
of the BBU power cable.
Table 7-76 Type of the BBU power cable
Cable
Power
Devices
Connector on
the Power
Device Side
Connector on
the BBU Side
Exterior
BBU power
cable
PDU and
DCDU-03B
OT terminal
(M4, 6 mm2 or
0.009 in.2)
3V3 connector
The exterior is
shown by 1 in
Figure 7-100.
EPS
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
The exterior is
shown by 2 in
Figure 7-100.
Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit type)
The exterior is
shown by 4 and
6 in Figure
7-100.
EPU03A-03 or
EPU03A-05
ETP48100-A1
EPU05A-03 or
EPU05A-05
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

457
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Cable
Power
Devices
Connector on
the Power
Device Side
Connector on
the BBU Side
Exterior
AC/DC power
system
supplying
power to a BBU
installed in the
OMB
H4 connector
The BBU power

cable has three
connectors.
Among the three
connectors, two
3V3 connectors
are connected to
the BBU and
HEUA, and one
H4 connector is
connected to the
AC/DC power
system. An H4
connector is
shown by 5 n
Figure 7-100.
AC/DC power
system
supplying
power to a BBU
installed in the
IMB03
H4 connector
The exterior is
shown by 3 n
Figure 7-100.
Exterior
Figure 7-100 shows a BBU power cable.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

458
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-100 BBU power cable
(1) 3V3 connector
(2) OT terminal (M4, 6 mm2 or

0.009 in.2)
(4) Tool-less female connector

(pressfit type)
(5) H4 connector
(3) Tool-less female connector

(pressfit type)
Cable Description
A power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-77 describes the pin assignment for the wires of
a power cable.
Table 7-77 BBU power cable description
Pin at the BBU
Side
Pin at the Power

Equipment Side
Wire Color in
Most Regions
Wire Color in
Other Regions
(UK)
A1
-48 V
Blue
Gray
A2
A3
GND
Black
Black
7.2.4 E1/T1 Cable

An E1/T1 cable transmits baseband signals from BBU to the external transmission equipment.
The maximum length of a E1/T1 cable is 50 m (164.04 ft).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

459
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
The E1/T1 cable is of three types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable, 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable, and
100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable.
One end of the E1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable
is prepared on site based on site requirements. Figure 7-101 shows an E1/T1 cable.
Figure 7-101 E1/T1 signal cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 7-78 lists different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables.

Table 7-78 Different types of 75 ohm E1 coaxial cables
Cable
One End
The Other End
75 ohm E1 coaxial cable
DB26 male connector
L9 male connector
L9 female connector
SMB female connector
BNC male connector
SMZ male connector
SMZ female connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-79, Table 7-80, and Table 7-81 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1
cable.
Table 7-79 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the DB26

Male Connector
Type(1)
Coaxial Unit No.
Wire Label
X1.1
Tip
RX1+

460
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the DB26

Male Connector
Type(1)
X1.2
Ring
X1.3
Tip
X1.4
Ring
X1.5
Tip
X1.6
Ring
X1.7
Tip
X1.8
Ring
X1.19
Tip
X1.20
Ring
X1.21
Tip
X1.22
Ring
X1.23
Tip
X1.24
Ring
X1.25
Tip
X1.26
Ring
Coaxial Unit No.
Wire Label
RX1-
RX2+
RX2-
RX3+
RX3-
RX4+
RX4-
TX1+
TX1-
TX2+
TX2-
TX3+
TX3-
TX4+
TX4-
NOTE
(1) "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.
Table 7-80 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the DB26

Male Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.1
Blue
Twisted pair
RX1+
X.2
White
X.3
Orange
X.4
White
X.5
Green
X.6
White
X.7
Brown
X.8
White
RX1Twisted pair
RX2+
RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+
RX3-
Twisted pair

RX4+
RX4461
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the DB26

Male Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.19
Gray
Twisted pair
TX1+
X.20
White
X.21
Blue
X.22
Red
X.23
Orange
X.24
Red
X.25
Green
X.26
Red
TX1Twisted pair
TX2+
TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+
TX3-
Twisted pair
TX4+
TX4-
Table 7-81 Pin assignment for the wires of the 100-ohm T1 twisted pair cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the DB26

Male Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Wire Label
X.1
Blue and white
Twisted pair
RX1+
X.2
White and blue
X.3
Orange and white
X.4
White and orange
X.5
Green and white
X.6
White and green
X.7
Brown and white
X.8
White and brown
X.19
Gray and white
X.20
White and gray
X.21
Blue and red
X.22
Red and blue
X.23
Orange and red
X.24
Red and orange
X.25
Green and red
X.26
Red and green
RX1Twisted pair
RX2+
RX2-
Twisted pair
RX3+
RX3-
Twisted pair
RX4+
RX4-
Twisted pair
TX1+
TX1-
Twisted pair
TX2+
TX2-
Twisted pair
TX3+
TX3-
Twisted pair

TX4+
TX4-
462
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
7.2.5 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the
transmission board. This cable is optional. The length of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
is 1.2 m (3.94 ft).
Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25
male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-102.
Figure 7-102 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-82 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer
cable.
Table 7-82 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin on the DB25 Male
Connector
Type

Connector
X1.20
Twisted pair cable
X2.2
X1.19
X1.4
X2.3
Twisted pair cable
X1.3
X1.22
X2.5
Twisted pair cable
X1.21
X1.6
Twisted pair cable
X2.8
X2.9
Twisted pair cable
X1.23
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
X2.6
X2.7
X1.5
X1.24
X2.4
X2.10
X2.11

463
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables

Connector
Type

Connector
X1.8
Twisted pair cable
X2.12
X1.7
X2.13
X1.1
Twisted pair cable
X2.14
X1.2
X2.15
X1.25
Twisted pair cable
X2.24
X1.26
X2.25
7.2.6 FE/GE Cable

The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission equipment through routing equipment.
It transmits baseband signals. The maximum length of the FE/GE cable is 50 m.
Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable and has an RJ45 connector at each end, as
Figure 7-103 FE/GE cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Cable Description
Table 7-83 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.
Table 7-83 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the RJ45

Connector at One
End
Color
Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector at

the Other End
X1.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X2.2
X1.1
White and
orange
X2.1
464
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the RJ45

Connector at One
End
Color
Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector at

the Other End
X1.6
Green
Twisted pair
X2.6
X1.3
White and
green
X1.4
Blue
X1.5
White and blue
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White and
brown
X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4
X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8
X2.7
7.2.7 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

The FE surge protection transfer cable is used to connect the UFLP and the main control board.
It is an optional cable. The length of an FE surge protection transfer cable is 1 m (3.28 ft).
Exterior
The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure
7-104.
Figure 7-104 FE surge protection transfer cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-84 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.
Table 7-84 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the RJ45

Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector
X1.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X2.2

465
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the RJ45

Connector
Wire Color
X1.1
White
X1.6
Green
X1.3
White
X1.4
Blue
X1.5
White
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connector

X2.1
Twisted pair
X2.6
X2.3
Twisted pair
X2.4
X2.5
Twisted pair
X2.8
X2.7
7.2.8 Interconnection Cable Between the FE Electrical Ports

This cable connects the FE electrical ports on two main control boards to enable IP-based cotransmission.
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end,
Figure 7-105 Interconnection cable between FE electrical ports
(1) RJ45 connector
7.2.9 Interconnection Cable Between FE Optical Ports

This cable connects the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT to achieve co-transmission
in IP mode.
Exterior
The interconnection cable between the FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

466
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-106 Interconnection cable between FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
7.2.10 FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

An FE/GE fiber optic cable transmits optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission
equipment. This cable is optional. The maximum length of an FE/GE fiber optic cable is 20 m
(65.62 ft).
Exterior
The FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,
or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-107, Figure 7-108, Figure 7-109.
Figure 7-107 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the FC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-108 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the SC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-109 FE/GE fiber optic cable (with the LC connectors)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

467
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
CAUTION
To connect a BBU3900 and a transmission device by using FE/GE optical fiber patch cords,
adhere to the following rules:
l
The TX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the RX port on the transmission
equipment.
The RX port on the BBU3900 must be connected to the TX port on the transmission
equipment.

CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber
optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
Multimode fiber optic cables connect the BBU and RRU or interconnect two RRUs. The
maximum length of the multimode fiber optic cable between the BBU and RRU is 150 m (492.12
ft) and the multimode fiber optic cable between two RRUs has a fixed length of 10 m (32.81 ft).
A single-mode fiber optic cable consists of the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber
optic cable, and the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are
interconnected using the ODF. The maximum length of the single-mode pigtail is 20 m (65.62
ft) on BBU side and 70 m (229.66 ft) on RRU side.
NOTE
l The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer and must comply with
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
l The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects the single-mode pigtail
and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.
l A multimode fiber optic cable and a single-mode fiber optic cable are connected to a multimode optical
module and a single-mode optical module, respectively.
Exterior
Multimode fiber optic cable: The multimode fiber optic cable has a DLC connector at each end,
Figure 7-110 Multimode fiber optic cable
(1) DLC connector
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
(2) Breakout cable
(3) Label on the breakout cable

468
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
NOTE
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout cable on the BBU side
is 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and the breakout cable on the RRU side is 0.03 m (0.098 ft).
l When a multimode fiber optic cable connects two RRUs, the breakout cable on both sides is 0.03 m
(0.098 ft).
Figure 7-111 shows the connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an
RRU.
Figure 7-111 Connection of the multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
(1) Multimode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
Single-mode pigtail: The single-mode pigtail has a DLC connector at one end and an FC, LC,
or SC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-112.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

469
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-112 Single-mode pigtail
(1) DLC connector (2) Breakout

cable
(3) Label on the (4) FC connector (5) LC connector (6) SC connector

breakout cable
NOTE
l When a single-mode pigtail connects a BBU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the BBU side and
ODF side are 0.34 m (1.12 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
l When a single-mode pigtail connects an RRU and an ODF, the breakout cables on the RRU side and
ODF side are 0.03 m (0.098 ft) and 0.8 m (2.62 ft), respectively.
Figure 7-113 shows the connection of the single-mode pigtail.

Figure 7-113 Connection of the single-mode pigtail
(1) Single-mode pigtail between a BBU and an ODF (2) Single-mode pigtail between an RRU and an ODF
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

470
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Selection Principles
The following table describes the principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables.
Table 7-85 Principles for selecting CPRI fiber optic cables
Remote
Distance
Selection Principle
Remarks
Less than or
equal to 100 m
(328.08 ft)
Multimode fiber optic cable
Connects the BBU and RRU
Greater than
100 m (328.08
ft) and equal to
or less than
150 m (492.12
ft)
Multimode fiber optic cable
Connects the BBU and RRU
Recommended: single-mode
fiber optic cable (single-mode
pigtail and trunk single-mode
fiber optic cable)
The single-mode pigtail at the RRU or BBU

side is connected to the trunk single-mode
fiber optic cable using the ODF.
Greater than
150 m (492.12
ft)
Single-mode fiber optic cable

(single-mode pigtail and trunk
single-mode fiber optic cable)
When it connects two RRUs, the distance

between the two RRUs must be equal to or
less than 10 m (32.81 ft).
Pin Assignment
Table 7-86 describes the labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a
CPRI fiber optic cable.
Table 7-86 Labels on and recommended connections for the breakout cables of a CPRI fiber
optic cable
Label
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Installation Position
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between a BBU
and an RRU
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between Two
RRUs
Single-Mode Pigtail
1A
CPRI RX port on the

RRU
CPRI RX port on
RRU 1
RX port on the BBU or

CPRI RX port on the
RRU
1B
CPRI TX port on the

RRU
CPRI TX port on
RRU 1
TX port on the BBU or

CPRI TX port on the
RRU
2A
TX port on the BBU
CPRI TX port on
RRU 0
ODF

471
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Label
2B
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between a BBU
and an RRU
Multimode Fiber
Optic Cable
Between Two
RRUs
Single-Mode Pigtail
RX port on the BBU
CPRI RX port on
RRU 0
ODF
7.2.12 APMI-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable is used to connect the APMI in the APM30 power
cabinet and the BBU. The cable transmits environment monitoring signals of the APM30 power
cabinet to the BBU.
Exterior
The APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable has an RJ45 connector at one end and four bare wires
at the other end. Figure 7-114 shows an APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-114 APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-87 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-87 Pin assignment for the wires of the APMI-BBU monitoring signal cable
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the
RJ45
Connector
Color
Pins of X2, X3,

X4, and X5
Description
Corresponding
Port on the
APMI
X1.1
White
X2
Twisted pair
TX+
X1.2
Orange
X3
X1.4
Blue
X4
X1.5
White
X5
TXTwisted pair

RX+
RX472
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
7.2.13 HEUB-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by the
HEUB to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-115 shows an HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-115 HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Cable Description
Table 7-88 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-88 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUB-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End
X2 End
Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.14 HEUA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

The HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable transmits the monitoring information collected by the
HEUA to the BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

473
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
Figure 7-116 shows an HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Figure 7-116 HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-89 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-89 Pin assignment for the wires of the HEUA-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU
and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-117 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

474
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-117 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-90 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between
the CMUA and the BBU.
Table 7-90 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and
the BBU
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.16 CMUEA-BBU Monitoring Signal Cable

A CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable connects the CMUEA and the BBU and transmits the
monitoring signals collected by the CMUEA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-118 shows a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

475
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-118 Exterior of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-91 describes the pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal
cable.
Table 7-91 Pin assignment for the wires of a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUA

A monitoring signal cable for the EMUA transmits monitoring signals from an EMUA to a BBU.
This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
Exterior
Figure 7-119 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

476
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-119 Monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-92 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the
EMUA.
Table 7-92 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA
Pin on the
RJ45
Connector
DB9 male
connector
Color
Description
Associated
Port on the
APMI
X1.1
X2.3
White
Twisted pair
TX+
X1.2
X2.7
Orange
X1.5
X2.6
White
X1.4
X2.2
Blue
TXTwisted pair
RXRX+
7.2.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power
status of the PSUs and receive related alarms.
Exterior
Figure 7-120 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-120 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

477
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin Assignment
Table 7-93 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).
Table 7-93 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End
Wire Color
Type
X1.2
Blue
Twisted pair
X1.1
White
X1.6
Orange
X1.3
White
X1.4
Green
X1.5
White
X1.8
Brown
X1.7
White
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position
status of the PSU.
Exterior
Figure 7-121 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 7-121 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-94 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU
(DC/DC).
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

478
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-94 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End
X2 End
Wire Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.20 BBU Alarm Cable

A BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from external alarm equipment to a BBU. The
maximum length of a BBU alarm cable is 20 m (65.62 ft).
Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-122. One RJ45
connector at one end, however, may be removed and an appropriate terminal may be added
according to the field requirements.
Figure 7-122 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-95 shows the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

479
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Table 7-95 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable
BBU
Alarm
Port
Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r
Wire
Color
Wire
Type
Pin on the
RJ45
Connecto
r
Description
EXTALM1
X1.1
White and
orange
Twisted
pair
X2.1
Boolean input 4+
X1.2
Orange
X2.2
Boolean input 4- (GND)
X1.3
White and
green
X2.3
Boolean input 5+
X1.6
Green
X2.6
X1.5
White and
blue
X2.5
Boolean input 6+
X1.4
Blue
X2.4
X1.7
White and
brown
X2.7
Boolean input 7+
X1.8
Brown
X2.8
X1.1
White and
orange
X2.1
Boolean input 0+
X1.2
Orange
X2.2
Boolean input 0+
(GND)
X1.3
White and
green
X2.3
Boolean input 1+
X1.6
Green
X2.6
X1.5
White and
blue
X2.5
Boolean input 2+
X1.4
Blue
X2.4
X1.7
White and
brown
X2.7
Boolean input 3+
X1.8
Brown
X2.8
EXTALM0
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
Twisted
pair
7.2.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable

The GPS clock signal cable is used to transmit GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system
to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU. This cable is
optional.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

480
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-123.
Figure 7-123 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector
(2) N-type female connector

The BBU interconnection signal cable connects BBU0 and BBU1 to forward information
between the BBUs.
Cable Type
BBU interconnection signal cables are classified into different types based on their functions,
as listed in Table 7-96.
Table 7-96 Cable type
Cable
Function
BBU interconnection signal

cable
Forwards control and

synchronization information
from one BBU to another
Connects the UMPT and the

UCIU
Forwards baseband
information from one BBU to
another
Interconnects two WBBPf

boards
Exterior
l
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting UCIU to UMPT forwards control and
synchronization information from one BBU to another. When two BBUs are installed in
the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long, as shown in Figure
7-124. When two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable
is 10 meters long, as shown in Figure 7-125.
481
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-124 BBU interconnection signal cable (1)
(1) DLC connector
(2) Breakout cable
(1) DLC connector
(2) Armoured cable
(3) Breakout cable
The BBU interconnection signal cable connecting WBBPf to WBBPf forwards baseband
information from one BBU to another, as shown in Figure 7-126. When two BBUs are
installed in the same cabinet, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 2 meters long. When
two BBUs are installed in two cabinets, the BBU interconnection signal cable is 10 meters
long.
(1) QSFP connector
(2) QSFP connector
7.2.23 Cable Between two Combined Base Stations

When a 3012 series base station and a 3900 series base station are installed side-by-side, the
cable between two combined base stations is used to connect the universal cascading interface
unit (UCIU) in the 3900 series base station and the cabinet top backplane for DTRU BTS (DCTB)
or DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Exterior
There are two types of cables that can be used to connect two combined base stations. Figure
7-127 shows the cable connected to the DCTB in the 3012 series base station.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

482
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-127 Cable between two combined base stations (1)
(1) MD36 male connector
Figure 7-128 shows the cable connected to the DGLUb in the 3012 series base station.
Figure 7-128 Cable between two combined base stations (2)
Pin Assignment
As shown in Figure 7-127, the cable has a DB15 male connector at one end and an MD36 male
connector at the other end. Table 7-97 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-97 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (1)
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin on the DB15

Male Connector
Pin on the MD36

Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.6
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.7
Blue
X1.3
X2.11
White
X1.4
X2.12
Orange
X1.5
X2.2
White
X1.10
X2.3
Green
X1.6
X2.15
White
X1.11
X2.16
Brown
X1.12
X2.10
White
X1.15
X2.28
Gray

Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
483
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Pin on the DB15

Male Connector
Pin on the MD36

Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.shell
X2.shell
Shield
As shown in Figure 7-128, the cable has a DB15 male connector at both ends. Table 7-98 lists
the pin assignment for the wires of the cable.
Table 7-98 Pin assignment for the wires of the cable between two combined base stations (2)
Pin on the DB15
Male Connector
Pin on the DB15

Male Connector
Color
Wire Type
X1.1
X2.1
White
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Blue
X1.3
X2.3
White
X1.4
X2.4
Orange
X1.5
X2.5
White
X1.10
X2.10
Green
X1.6
X2.6
White
X1.11
X2.11
Brown
X1.12
X2.12
White
X1.15
X2.15
Gray
X1.shell
X2.shell
Shield
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.2.24 Adapter Used for Local Maintenance

An adapter used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an Ethernet cable
during local maintenance.
Exterior
The adapter used for local maintenance has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet
connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-129.
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)

484
DBS3900
7 DBS3900 Cables
Figure 7-129 Adapter used for local maintenance
(1) USB connector
(2) Ethernet connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-99 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance.
Table 7-99 Pin assignment for the wires of the adapter used for local maintenance
Issue 11 (2013-08-23)
Pin of the USB

Connector
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin of the Ethernet

Connector
X1.9
Blue
Twisted pair
X2.1
X1.8
White
X1.6
Orange
X1.5
White
X1.Shell
X2.2
Twisted pair
X2.3
X2.6
Shield

X2.Shell
485

DBS3900 Hardware Description 2013

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DBS3900 Hardware Description 2013

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DBS3900

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

About This Document

DBS3900 LTE TDD

Base station installation personnel

Site maintenance personnel

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

2 Application Scenario of the DBS3900 Cabinet

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Book titles are in italics.

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italics.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

About This Document

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3 Functional Modules in the DBS3900.......................................................................................55

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

4 DBS3900 Cabinets and Racks..................................................................................................163

5 DBS3900 Power System............................................................................................................273

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System..................................................................................................326

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

7.1.1 Power Cable Connections........................................................................................................................................349

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description

Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware

This chapter describes the changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description.

Added the LBBPd4 used in LTE TDD

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description

l 2.1 Outdoor Installation Scenarios with

Added description related to an IBBS700T or

l 4.1 Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks

Added specifications of these boards.

Added the principles for classifying and

Compared with issue 09 (2013-02-20), no information is deleted from this issue.

Added the description of UMPTb1.

Compared with issue 08 (2012-12-30), no information is deleted from this issue.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

1 Changes in the DBS3900 Hardware Description

7.2.22 BBU interconnection signal cable

Modified the exterior and length of the BBU

7.2.3 BBU Power Cable